You are on page 1of 516

Biolyzer 300

Service Manual

Analyticon
Biotechnologies AG
Am Muehlenberg 10
35104 Lichtenfels - Germany
info@analyticon-diagnostics.com
www.analyticon-diagnostics.com

agile - affordable - accurate


®
Servicemanual Biolyzer 300

WARRANTY

The term of warranty of this analyzer is one year from the date of purchase.
Our company shall not be responsible for the following failures and damages for the
warranty period.
1. Failure/damage caused by the result of misuse.
2. Failure/damage caused by repair or alternation performed by any company other
than our company.
3. Failure/damage caused by the phenomenon which is due to other than our
product.
4. Failure/damage caused by the condition beyond the normal operating condition of
this analyzer such as the power supply and the installation environment.
5. Failure/damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood damage or other natural
disaster.
6. Failure/damage caused by shift or transportation performed by other than our
company after our installation.

TRADEMARKS
Windows XP Professional, Windows Vista Business, Windows Vista Home Premium,
Windows 7 and Microsoft .NET FrameWork2.0 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.

COPYRIGHT OF INDY SOFTWARE


Portions of this software are Copyright © 1993-2003, Chad Z. Hower (Kudzu) and the
Indy Pit Crew – http://www.IndyProject.org/
®
Servicemanual Biolyzer 300

REVISION RECORD
The latest edition supersedes any preceding ones. If you have old editions, discard
them to avoid possible confusion.

REV. DATE REVISION HIGHLIGHT


0A Oct., 2010 Published as first version.
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Foreword 0-1
1. Safety precautions 0-2
2. Precautions for Use 0-5
3. <Warning and caution labels> 0-13
4. Installation environment 0-14
5. Handling of barcode reader (option: Sample barcode reader) 0-24
6. Statement for EMC requirement 0-25
Chapter 1 Overview 1-1
1.1 General 1-1
1.2 Appearance 1-2
1.3 Built-in Units 1-4
1.3.1 Function for each unit 1-4
1.3.2 Unit description 1-8
Chapter 2 Unit description 2-1
2.1 Chassis unit (CHS) 2-2
2.1.1 Frame (FRM) 2-2
2.1.2 Cover (CVR) 2-4
2.1.3 Power supply unit (PSU) 2-6
2.1.4 Control unit (CNU) 2-8
2.2 Reaction table block (RTB) 2-9
2.2.1 Incubation reaction unit (IRU) 2-9
2.2.2 Detector unit (DTR) 2-11
2.2.3 Washing unit (WU) 2-13
2.3 Stirrer unit (MIX) 2-15
2.3.1 Stirrer unit 1 (MIX1) and Stirrer unit 2 (MIX2) 2-15
2.4 Pipette unit (PT) 2-16
2.4.1 Sample Pipette unit (SPT) 2-16
2.4.2 Reagent Pipette unit (RPT) 2-18
2.5 Trough unit (TR) 2-20
2.6 Sample container unit (ASP) 2-22
2.7 Reagent container unit (RCU) 2-24
2.8 Pump unit (PP) 2-27
2.8.1 Sample pump unit (SPP) 2-27
2.8.2 Reagent pump unit (RPP) 2-29
2.8.3 Wash pump unit (WPP) 2-31
2.8.4 Subtank (SUBTK) 2-33
2.9 Supply water unit (SWU) 2-34
Table of Contents

2.10 External tanks 2-35


2.10.1 Purified water/wash solution tank unit (STK) and wastewater tank unit (WTK)
2-35
2.11 Option 2-36
2.11.1 ISE unit (ISE) 2-36
2.11.2 Degassing unit (DGU) 2-38
2.11.3 External tank sensors 2-39
Chapter 3 PC boards 3-1
3.1 General 3-1
3.2 Types and Functions of PC Boards 3-1
3.3 Hierarchy of major PCB 3-3
Chapter 4 Unpacking and installation 4-1
4.1 Installation site 4-1
4.2 Unpacking and installation 4-3
4.2.1 Unpacking 4-3
4.3 Installation 4-6
4.3.2 Dismounting fixing tapes and protective material 4-7
4.3.3 Dismounting protective material 4-8
4.3.4 Dismounting cuvette dustproof cover 4-10
4.3.5 Level 4-11
4.3.6 Signal cable connection / tubng 4-12
4.4 Dye test at the installation 4-20
4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent 4-20
4.5 Prior to measurement 4-21
4.5.1 Purified water and wash solution 4-21
4.5.2 Power ON and log in by Engineer level 4-22
4.5.3 Open channel setting for RCU 4-23
4.5.4 Prime 4-24
4.5.5 Cuvette wash, automatic gain, and water blank measurement 4-25
4.5.6 Reagent registration 4-27
4.5.7 Chemistry parameter setting 4-28
4.5.8 Calibration setting 4-29
4.5.9 Test order registration 4-30
4.5.10 Reagent bottle placement 4-31
4.5.11 Sample placement 4-31
4.6 Measurement start 4-32
4.7 Check the measurement results 4-33
4.8 L3 user account setting 4-35
4.9 Ending procedure and clean-up 4-36
Table of Contents

4.10 Check list at installation 4-37


Chapter 5 Cleaning 5-1
5.1 Sample/reagent pipette 5-1
5.2 Washing unit 5-4
5.3 Stirrer 5-5
5.4 Sample container 5-6
5.5 Reagent container 5-7
5.6 Work table 5-8
5.7 External Tanks 5-9
5.8 Tube wash 5-10
5.9 Cuvettes 5-17
5.10 ISE cleaning (option) 5-19
Chapter 6 Periodical checks 6-1
6.1 Periodical checks 6-1
Chapter 7 Maintenance screens 7-1
7.1 Login for EL level 7-1
7.2 Sequence 7-1
7.3 Water blank 7-15
7.4 Performance 7-19
7.5 Sensor 7-22
7.6 Volume Adjustment 7-25
7.7 DTR Position 7-27
7.8 Operation Logs 7-28
Chapter 8 Parts replacement 8-1
8.1 Chassis unit (CHS) 8-3
8.1.1 Replacement of covers (CVR) 8-3
8.1.2 Replacement of panels 8-4
8.1.3 Replacement of frame (FRM) 8-6
8.1.4 Replacement of Power supply unit (PSU) 8-11
8.1.5 Replacement of Control unit (CNU) 8-15
8.2 Reaction table block unit (RTB) 8-17
8.2.1 Replacement of Reaction table block unit (RTB) 8-17
8.2.2 Replacement of Incubation reaction unit (IRU) 8-18
8.2.3 Replacement of Detector unit (DTR) 8-37
8.2.4 Replacement of Washing unit (WU) 8-40
8.3 Stirrer unit (MIX) 8-51
8.3.1 Replacement of Stirrer unit 1 (MIX1) and Stirrer unit 2 (MIX2) 8-51
8.4 Pipette unit (SPT, RTP) 8-57
8.4.1 Replacement of Sample pipette unit (SPT) 8-57
Table of Contents

8.4.2 Replacement of Reagent pipette unit (RPT) 8-70


8.5 Trough unit (TR) 8-73
8.6 Sample container unit (ASP) 8-78
8.7 Reagent container unit (RCU) 8-89
8.8 Pump unit (PP) 8-101
8.8.1 Replacement of Sample pump unit (SPPS) 8-101
8.8.2 Replacement of Sample pump unit (SPPW) 8-107
8.8.3 Replacement of Reagent pump unit (RPP) 8-113
8.8.4 Replacement of Reagent pump unit (RPPW) 8-118
8.8.5 Replacement of Wash pump unit (WPP) 8-120
8.8.6 Replacement of Subtank unit (SUBTK) 8-130
8.9 Supply water unit (SWU) 8-131
8.10 Option 8-138
8.10.1 Replacement of ISE unit (ISE) 8-138
8.10.2 Replacement of Reagent barcode reader (RCU_BCR) 8-140
8.10.3 Replacement of Sample barcode reader (ASP_BCR) 8-140
8.10.4 Replacement of Degassing unit (DGU) 8-141
8.10.5 Replacement of Clot detection sensor (CDS) 8-148
Chapter 9 Position adjustment of unit 9-1
9.1 List of position adjustment jigs 9-2
9.2 Required position adjustment 9-4
9.3 Preparation 9-5
9.4 SPT position adjustment 9-6
9.4.1 SPT height value adjustment 9-6
9.4.2 SPT-IRU position adjustment 9-11
9.5 ASP positioning adjustment 9-12
9.6 Position adjustment of SPT trough 9-13
9.7 ISE position adjustment 9-15
9.8 RPT position adjustment 9-17
9.8.1 RPT height value adjustment 9-17
9.8.2 RPT-IRU position adjustment 9-22
9.9 RCU position adjustment 9-23
9.10 Position adjustment of RPT trough 9-25
9.11 MIX1 height and position adjustment 9-27
9.11.1 MIX1 height value adjustment 9-27
9.11.2 MIX1-IRU position adjustment 9-30
9.12 MIX1 trough position adjustment 9-32
9.13 MIX2 height and position adjustment 9-33
9.13.1 MIX2 height value adjustment 9-33
Table of Contents

9.13.2 MIX2-IRU position adjustment 9-36


9.14 MIX2 trough position adjustment 9-38
9.15 Adjustment for WU height and WU-IRU position 9-39
9.15.1 WU height value adjustment 9-39
9.15.2 WU-IRU position adjustment 9-42
9.15.3 Wipe tip position adjustment 9-44
9.16 IRU cuvette table position adjustment 9-46
9.17 End procedure after adjustment 9-48
Chapter 10 Software setup and update 10-1
10.1 Preparatory setup (in Windows XP) 10-1
10.1.1 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Setup 10-1
10.1.2 Security setting (Firewall settings off) 10-4
10.1.3 Security setting (Automatic updating off) 10-5
10.1.4 Screen setting 10-6
10.1.5 Regional setting 10-9
10.1.6 Printer setting 10-12
10.1.7 Setting for Hyper Terminal 10-14
10.1.8 FFFTP setting 10-18
10.2 Preparatory setup (in Windows Vista) 10-21
10.2.1 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Setup 10-21
10.2.2 Security setting (Firewall settings off) 10-22
10.2.3 Security setting (Automatic updating off) 10-23
10.2.4 Security setting (Malware protection off) 10-24
10.2.5 Screen setting 10-25
10.2.6 Regional setting 10-29
10.2.7 Windows setting 10-34
10.2.8 Daylight saving time setting 10-35
10.2.9 Printer setting 10-36
10.2.10 Telnet connection setting 10-37
10.2.11 FFFTP setting 10-39
10.3 Analyzer software update 10-42
10.4 User-interface software update 10-44
10.5 Changing correction parameters 10-46
Chapter 11 Specification 11-1
11.1 Technical Specification 11-1
11.2 Analysis Specifications 11-7
Chapter 12 Special tools and materials 12-1
Chapter 13 Maintenance parts list 13-1
13.1 Consumable parts 13-1
Table of Contents

13.2 Periodical replacement parts 13-2


13.3 Maintenance parts 13-4
13.4 Parts layouts 13-12
Chapter 14 Electrical connections 14-1
Chapter 15 Fluidic system diagram 15-1
15.1 Inside fluidic system diagram 15-1
15.2 Fluidic tube number list 15-3
15.3 Fluidic diagram 15-6
Chapter 16 Sensor list 16-1
Chapter 17 Test points 17-1
Chapter 18 Barcode (BCR) adjustment 18-1
18.1 In case when the barcode label cannot be read 18-1
18.2 Adjustment of the BCR reading position 18-3
18.3 Barcode label position 18-9
Chapter 19 LAN connection check 19-1
19.1 Connection check 19-1
19.2 LAN check (Ping command) 19-1
Foreword

Foreword
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for selecting and purchasing the FURUNO
Fully Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer.
Prior to use, please read this service manual carefully and follow the recommended
procedures for operation and maintenance.
The analyzer is designed to measure human specimen (Serum, Plasma, and Urine).
It enables to operate by connecting to PC and print out the measurement results.

Precaution
 The service manual is for clinical laboratory technologists, who operate the
analyzer.

 The contents in the manual are subject to change without notice.

1
Foreword

Precaution for use and installation environment


This section describes notes when using the analyzer, the installation environment
required for normal operation, standard accessory, and warning labels.
Prior to use, please read the manual.
Not using procedures which the manufacturer recommends will void the warranty.

1. Safety precautions
1.1 Prevention of damage and ignition
Please observe the following precautions to prevent damage and ignitio n of the
analyzer.

 Install the analyzer under the installation environment and conditions


described in the manual.

 When changing the installation site, contact our servicing or sales division.

1.2 Prevention of electric shock


Please observe the following precautions to prevent electric shock caused by the use
of the analyzer.

 Do not detach the front, the rear, or the side cover during measurement.

 If any leakage inside the analyzer, contact our servicing division. Careless
action may cause electric shock.

1.3 Prevention of injury


Please observe the following precautions to prevent injury while using the analyzer.

 Do not touch moving or opening parts during operation.

 For halogen lamp replacement, turn the power off and wait for the lamp to ge t
cold for more than 30 minutes. Then perform replacement. Direct contact
with the heated lamp may cause burn injury.

 For safety reasons, follow the instructions on the labels attached to the
analyzer and the service manual.

 For printers, refer to its accompanying operator’s manual.

2
Foreword

1.4 Protection of eyes


Follow the precautions to protect eyes.

 Do not look directly at the lighted halogen lamp or the laser beam from the
barcode reader. It may cause eye injury.

1.5 To ensure the accuracy of measurement data

 Do not detach the front, the rear, or the side cover during measurement.

 Do not open top cover during measurement.

 If the lid of Reagent Container or Sample Container is open during


measurement, the measurement will be aborted.

 Do not open the lid of the ISE unit during measurement.

 Perform QC measurement for system integrity.

 As for maintenance checks and periodical parts replacement, follow the


instructions on this manual.

 For handling reagent, quality control sample, or calibrator, follow the


manufacturer’s or sales representative’s specific instructions.

1.6 Disposal of waste


Special attention is required for disposal of waste and used samples. The analyzer
has each tube for the high-concentrated and the low concentrated wastes to discharge
the waste separately. Follow the precautions below.

 Reagent, quality control sample, calibrator, or wash solution may contain


some substances that are regulated under your local/national guidelines or
effluent standard. Contact the manufacturers or sales representatives for
disposal under your local/national guidelines.

3
Foreword

1.7 Prevention of infection


Improper handling of samples may cause infection. Please observe the following
precautions to prevent infection.

 Do not touch directly samples, reagents, or waste that may be infectious. In


case of handling them, make sure to wear protective gloves, masks and
goggles for preventing infection. If you touch them accidentally, follow your
operating procedure and consult a physician as required. If any infectious
liquids recognized on the analyzer, wipe them off immediately.

1.8 Handling of reagents


Please observe the following precautions to prevent injury.

 Some reagents are strong acid or strong alkali. Be careful not to touch them
directly with hands or spill over your clothes. If they mistakenly spill over
your skin or clothes, immediately wash thoroughly with water and soap. If
they contact eyes, flush thoroughly with plenty of water and consult a
physician.

1.9 Prevention of affect on other facility/equipment

 Install appropriate power supply wiring not to affect other major instruments
(such as surgical instruments) or the facilities from the system failure.

4
Foreword

2. Precautions for Use


Follow the precautions for safe and efficient operation.

2.1 General precautions for use of the analyzer


A. Use of samples

 The analyzer is designed to measure human specimen (such as serum,


plasma, and urine). Some samples may not be measurable depending on the
methods or reagents. In such cases, contact the manufacturer or sales
representatives.

 Apply samples that contain no suspended particles. As for serum samples,


apply those with no blood clots. Use of serum samples with blood clots or
urine samples with suspended particles may cause the analyzer’s pipette to
get clogged, and adversely affect the analysis processing.

 Note that there are some cases where a significant clinical affect is achieved
depending on chemical substances which coexist with samples (such as
medication, anticoagulant, and preservative).

 If sample pretreatment particularly for the analysis metho d is required, consult


the relevant reagent manufacturers and sales representatives. Regarding
the advisability of serum separation agents, refer to their manufacturers.

B. Storage of samples

 Store samples in an appropriate manner. Samples stored under an


inappropriate environment may deteriorate in quality. (For example, blood kept
in cold storage recognizes increased potassium level.)

 To prevent samples from evaporating, do not leave the sample containers


unsealed for a long time. Evaporated sample may affect accuracy of analysis
processing.

5
Foreword

C. Pretreatment and handling of samples

 Fibrins contained in serum may clog the pipettes. When separating serum,
make sure that blood is clotted enough. Samples used for measurement
shall be free of fibrin.

 To apply urine as a sample, if there is suspension of particles in the urine


sample, centrifugalize the urine sample so that the suspended particles get
precipitated.

 If sample pretreatment particularly for the measurement methods is required,


consult the relevant reagent manufacturers and sales representatives.
Regarding the advisability of serum separation agents, refer to their
manufacturers.

D. Handling of reagents, calibrators, and control samples

 For storing, handling, and use of reagents, calibrators, and quality control
samples, follow the instructions of the relevant manufacturers and sales
representatives.

 Reagents, calibrators, and quality control samples stored under inappropriate


condition, even though they are within the specified expiry date, may affect
accuracy of measurement results. For storage, follow the instructions
specified on their packaging, container or attached documents.

 For stability after opening the package, refer to the relevant manufacturers
and sales representatives.

 Be sure to perform calibration after each reagent replacement. To obtain


correct measurement results, appropriate calibration is required.

E. Reagent interference of assay method-to-method

 Reagent contaminated from other reagents may adversely affect the


measurement results in the analysis process. Refer to the relevant
manufacturers and sales representatives for details because the influence is
different by each reagent.

6
Foreword

F. Analysis performance

 Under hemolysis, turbidity or increased bilirubin level condition in samples, the


medical agent or its metabolic products may adversely affect measurement
results. Refer to the relevant manufacturers and sales representatives for
details.

G. Connection of supply/drain tubes

 Make sure that there is no bending or loops for tube connection be tween
connector and tank. Inappropriate connection may cause troubles including
tube disconnection during operation, leakage, etc.

 Make sure to prevent air bubbles from entering purified water into the
analyzer.

H. Using of the genuine cuvettes made by FURUNO

 Apply the specific cuvettes that are approved by FURUNO.

I. Electromagnetic waves, noise, etc.

 Do not install the analyzer near the equipment that generates an abnormal
noise.

 Turn off a portable radio or cellular phone near the analyzer. Abnormal noise
or electromagnetic waves generated from the portable radio or cellular phone
may cause malfunction of the analyzer.

 Do not install the analyzer near the medical equipment that may generate
electromagnetic waves.

J. Operational environment of the analyzer

 Operate the analyzer with temperature: 15 to 30ºC, humidity: 45 to 85% and


temperature variation: less than ±2ºC per hour.

 Use purified water with temperature 5 to 25 ºC. Operation out of the


recommended range may adversely affect measurement results.

K. Monitor, keyboard, and mouse

 Do not handle monitor, keyboard, and mouse with wet hand (water, reagents,
etc) to prevent failure.

7
Foreword

L. Points to check at measurement

Follow your operation standards on the points to check at measurement.


Check the following points at least:

 Quality of purified water

 Remaining amount of reagents and wash solutions

 Calibration results

 QC measurement data

 Measurement results

 No leakage from Sample Pipette, Reagent Pipette, and tubes.

 No suspended particles or air bubbles in samples.

 Enough amounts of samples required for measurement.

M. Maintenance checks and periodical parts replacement

 Follow the instructions on the manual for m aintenance checks and periodical
parts replacement.

 Perform calibration after each major parts replacement.

 Use consumable and replacement parts we recommend. Use of


non-recommended consumables or parts may adversely affect the accuracy
and safety of the analyzer.

 The used parts after replacement may be infected. For disposal, refer to the
relevant manufacturers and sales representatives and follow your company or
national regulation.

N. Backup of data

 Periodically back up data such as parameters and measurement results saved


in the analyzer. It will enable data recovery at unexpected events such as
analyzer failure and power interruption.

O. Virus check

 The analyzer is not equipped with virus check software. Prepare a


designated USB memory for the analyzer. Check the USB memory for virus
prior to a use with the analyzer with a PC with anti-virus software installed.

P. Prohibition of use for purposes other than those intended

 Do not use the analyzer for purposes other than those intended.

8
Foreword

Q. Cleaning of covers

 When external covers such as covers, work table, and touch panel display
become dirty, wipe and clean them with a neutral detergent moistened gauze.

R. Other cautions

 If accidentally any reagent or sample contacts mucous, or if any reagent or


sample is swallowed, immediately consult a physician for the instructions.

S. Operation problems

 In the event of operation problems, do not play with the analyzer and leave
repair work to authorized experts.

T. General precautions on ISE unit

 Reagents (such as L Solution, Ref Solution, H Solution, Cleaning solution,


Etching, and urine diluents) are required to be stored in a cold dark place.

 After long-term interval or immediately after installation, measurement or


calibration results may be beyond the acceptable range. In this case,
perform ISE priming more than 10 times for the ISE pumping ready for
operation.

 When applying the ISE unit, do not turn OFF the analyzer. L Solution is
automatically discharged into the ISE electrodes every five minutes to prevent
the electrodes from drying.

 Check all the electrodes are properly installed into the ISE module prior to
operation. If not properly installed, L solution may leak inside the analyzer
and cause mechanical errors.

9
Foreword

General precautions for use of medical electrical equipment

(For safety and prevention of danger)

The following is general precautions for use of medical electrical equipm ents. Please
read this manual to fully understand and handle properly.
If the equipment is not used in a manner specified by the manufacturer, the protection
may be impaired.

1. Only qualified personnel shall use the analyzer.

2. The following precautions shall be taken when the analyzer is installed.

 Keep the analyzer away from any other water.

 Avoid areas where the analyzer may be adversely affected by atmospheric


pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt,
or sulfur, etc.

 Do not expose the analyzer to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock


during transportation) and pay attention to the state of safety.

 Do not install the analyzer in a place adjacent to a storage room of chemicals


or a place where any gas is likely to be generated.

 Check frequency, voltage and permissible current (or power consumption).

 Make sure that the analyzer is correctly and well grounded.

 Secure the space (minimum 300mm) at the left hand of analyzer to turn off the
analyzer at emergency situation easily.

 In the case of carrying the analyzer (weight: approx. 120 kg), at least four
persons should lift the analyzer by holding tightly the grip areas at the bottom
of analyzer.

3. The following precautions shall be taken before using the analyzer.

 Confirm that the analyzer operates correctly by periodically checking contact


status of switches, polarity, dial setting, and maters, etc.

 Make sure that the analyzer is correctly and completely grounded.

 Make sure that all necessary electrical cables are correctly and completely
connected.

10
Foreword

 Special care shall be taken not to result in misdiagnosis or any danger to


analyzer or human body when the analyzer is used in conjunction with other
equipment.

4. The following precautions shall be taken during operation.

 Do not exceed the required period and dosage for the diagnosis and
treatment.

 Take immediate corrective measures including shutdown of analyzer when any


malfunction is detected.

 Avoid any possibilities of direct access from patients.

5. The following precautions shall be taken after use of the analyzer.

 Turn off the power after every operational switch and control is restored to its
pre-use state as directed.

 Do not apply extra force when disconnecting the line cord plugs from
receptacles.

 Storage areas:
(1) Keep the analyzer away from any other water.
(2) Avoid areas where the analyzer may be adversely affected by atmospheric
pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing
salt or sulfur, etc.
(3) Do not expose the analyzer to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock
during transportation), etc. and pay attention to the state of safety.
(4) Do not store the analyzer in the storage area of chemicals or a place where
any gas is likely to be generated.

 Organize and store the accessory parts and cords after they have been
cleaned.

 Keep the analyzer clean not to cause any inconvenience to the next use.

6. In the event of trouble, do not play with the analyzer and leave repair work to
authorized experts.

7. Do not make over the analyzer.

8. Conduct maintenance checks regularly.

 Perform periodical checks on the analyzer and its parts.

 Make sure to check that the analyzer operates normally and safely when it is
reused after being kept unused for some time.

11
Foreword

9. The following precautions shall be taken when the cleaning procedure will be
performed.

 Appropriate decontamination should be carried out if contaminated substance


is scattered inside and outside the analyzer.

 If appropriate decontamination solvents or cleaning solvents are not used and


they come into contact with the analyzer or parts of the analyzer, the
hazardous situation may occur.

 Please contact our servicing division if there is any problem about


decontamination or cleaning agents.

10. For disposal of the analyzer, please contact our servicing division in advance.

11. When moving the analyzer, please contact our servicing division in advance.

12. When USB flash drive is used as the external storage device, don't remove the
flash drive from USB port while the flash drive's indicator is lighting. Otherwise,
the data in the flash drive may be broken and/or the trouble on the analyzer may
cause.

12
Foreword

3. <Warning and caution labels>


A. Label description

The following labels are affixed on the major hazardous places within the analyzer and
added in their described parts of this manual.

Warning, biological hazard

Warning, electric shock

Warning, risk of injury

General warning, caution, risk of danger


Follow the instruction described on the service manual.

B. Labels affixed on the analyzer

The following labels are affixed on the major hazardous places.

Warning, electric shock (power switch))

Warning, hot surface (lamp case)

Warning, contains hazardous materials (pipette cover, stirrer unit cover,


supply/drain tube connection, lid of Sample Container)

Warning, contains hazardous materials


(high conc. wastewater tank and low conc. wastewater
tank)

<Option> Caution - laser light from barcode reader


(sample barcode reader)

13
Foreword

4. Installation environment
 Installation operation (such as unpacking, installation, and operation check)
will be performed by our approved service representative.

A. Installation environment conditions

The analyzer shall be installed;

 In a place that is not subject to direct sunlight.

 In a place that is not exposed to direct wind, rain or any other water. (The
analyzer shall be installed indoors.)

 In a dustless place.

 In a place that is not subject to vibration or sound.

 In not inclined but horizontal place (slope: 1/200 or less ).

 On the floor that is strong enough to support the weight of the whole analyzer
system (approx. 120kg).

 In a place that is not subject to voltage variation (less than ±10%).

 Not near noise sources (facility or equipment). Avoid placing the analyzer
under the fluorescent light.

 At the height of 2,000 meters above sea-level or lower. (Use the analyzer only
indoors.)

 Avoid areas where the analyzer may be adversely affected by atmospheric


pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air c ontaining
salt or sulfur, etc.

 Do not store the analyzer in the storage area of chemicals or a place where
any gas is likely to be generated.

B. Temperature/humidity conditions

 Indoor temperature: 15 to 30ºC, Temperature variation: less than 2ºC per hour.

 Indoor humidity: 45 to 85% (no condensation shall be formed.)

 Install the analyzer in a place with good ventilation or with ventilation system.

 Do not install the analyzer in a place subject to direct wind from air
conditioning.

14
Foreword

4.1 Space
Refer to the figure below for space required for installation including space for
maintenance and for exhaust ventilation.

 A space of at least 300mm at the left side of analyzer to easily power off the
analyzer at the emergency situation.

 A space of at least 150mm at the back of the analyzer for adequate ventilation.

 A space of at least 500mm at the front of the analyzer for operation and
maintenance.

 Place the analyzer (weighing approx. 120kg) on the table or workbench


durable enough.

15
Foreword

4.2 Power supply


Install a 3-pronged power cable with a ground terminal (A-type, S-type, or O-type)
within the reach of the analyzer’s accessory power cable (2m). Ground resistance
shall be less than 100Ω.

 Installation work of power supply needs to be done by qualified personnel only.

16
Foreword

4.3 Water supply and drainage


The six kinds of the supply/drain tube connections are identified at the right side of the
analyzer. The external tank sensors are available for installation (option).

Type of water supply and drainage Type of tube Remarks


Purified water supply Purified water Silicon tube Analyzer – Purified (system)

water tank (20L)

High conc. wastewater Wastewater from washing unit Silicon tube Analyzer – High conc.

(drain nozzle # 1 and 2) wastewater tank (10L)

Low conc. wastewater Wastewater from washing unit Silicon tube Analyzer – Low conc.

(drain nozzle # 3, 4, and 5) wastewater tank (20L)

Trough Silicon tube

Wash solution 1 supply Wash Solution No. 3 Silicon tube Analyzer-

Wash solution1 tank (5L/2L)

Wash solution 2 supply Wash Solution No. 9 Silicon tube Analyzer-

Wash solution2 tank (5L/2L)

 The water supply system and the low conc. wastewater drainage system need
to be placed prior to the analyzer installation.

 Place the high conc. wastewater tank for high conc. waste.

 Dispose of the high conc. waste according to your local/national guidelines.

17
Foreword

4.4 Component list


A. Component list

No. Name Model/standard Qty Remarks

1 CA-270 1 Analyzer

2 Attached document SQA-X04-018 1 Document

3 A set of accessories 1 Refer to accessories list

B. Accessories list

No. Classification Name Model/ Qty Remarks

Standard

1 Analyzer Operator’s manual OM-E7229 1

2 Analyzer Power cable *1 25S1031(VDE) (1) Connecting to

25S3516(UL,CSA) (1) analyzer

25S3254(GB) (1)

25S3206(BS) (1)

3 Analyzer LAN cable 25S4116 1 Analyzer -

operational PC

4 Tube Water supply tube 25-040-S3201 1 Purified water

supply tube

1 Wash solution 1

supply tube *2

1 Wash solution 2

supply tube *2

5 Tube Waste tube 25-040-3201 2 Low conc. waste

tube

1 High conc. waste

tube

6 Tube Silencer 2003-63(E-L) 2

7 Tank Purified (system) water tank 25AP-X-5002 1

(20L) *3

8 Tank Low conc. wastewater tank 25AP-X-5006 1

(20L) *3

9 Tank High conc. wastewater tank 25AP-X-5007 1

(10L) *3

10 Tank Wash solution1 tank (5L) *4 25AZ-X-4951 1 Wash Solution

No. 3

11 Tank Wash solution2 tank (5L) *4 25AZ-X-4952 1 Wash Solution

No. 9

18
Foreword

No. Classification Name Model/ Qty Remarks

Standard

12 Tool Syringe tip insertion jig 25-012-4101 1

13 Tool MIX paddle jig 25-040-1821 1

14 Tool + Screwdriver No. 123-S75 1

15 Tool Hex wrench 1.5 1.5mm 1

16 Tool Hex wrench 3.0 3.0mm 1

17 Spare part Ceramic tube fuse 10A/250V 2 Fuse holder

0326 010.MXP (AC input) F1 &

F2

18 Wash solution Wash Solution No. 3 25S3234 1

20 Wash solution Wash Solution No. 9 25S3236 1

21 Wash solution Wash Solution No. 10-2 25S3230 1

22 Wash solution Wash Solution C-1 25S3251 1

C. Options list

No. Classification Name Model/standard Qty Remarks

1 External tank External tank sensor table 25-040-S3702 1 Sensor for wash

sensor solution

Water supply tube *2 25-040-S3703 1 Wash solution 1

supply tube

Water supply tube *2 1 Wash solution 2

supply tube

Purified (system) water tank 25AP-X-3805 1

(20L) sensor

Low conc. wastewater tank 25AP-X-3806 1

(20L) sensor

High conc. wastewater tank 25AP-X-3807 1

(10L) sensor

Cable connector 1 Analyzer –

external tank

sensor table

Purified (system) water tank 25AP-X-5401 1

(20L) *3

Low conc. wastewater tank 25AP-X-5402 1

(20L) *3

High conc. wastewater tank 25AP-X-5403 1

(10L) *3

Wash solution1 tank (2L) *4 1

19
Foreword

Wash solution2 tank (2L) *4 1

2 Cleaning jig Pipette cleaning jig 25-012-4102 1

*1 One of the four fuses will be enclosed depending on your region.

*2 When selecting external tank sensor (option), the tubes will be enclosed with the options. However,

when not selecting, the tubes will be enclosed with the accessories.

*3 When selecting external tank sensor (option), the external tanks (purified water tank, Low conc.

wastewater tank, and High conc. wastewater tank) will be enclosed with the options. However, when

not selecting, the tanks will be enclosed with the accessories.

*4 When selecting external tank sensor (option), the external tanks (wash solution 1/2 tanks (2L)) will be

enclosed with the options. However, when not selecting, the tanks (wash solution 1/2 tanks (5L) will

be enclosed with the accessories.

20
Foreword

4.5 Software operating environment


Item Specification

OS Window XP Professional version + Multi-language (option)

Windows Vista Business

Windows Vista Home Premium

Windows 7

*32Bit version only

*Microsoft .NET FrameWork 2.0 installed

CPU Intel CPU 1GHz or more

*Recommended OS environment or above

Hard Disc 2GB or more (capacity before analyzer installation)

*Recommended OS environment or above

Memory 512 Mbytes or more

*Recommended OS environment or above

VGA 1280 x 1024 or more

Color Depth 320,000 colors or more

Serial port RS232C (only when using ASTM)

*Not available for USB conversion

Ethernet 10/100/1000Base-T

Sound function Sound function + speaker (when using alarm sounds)

CD/DVD-ROM At the time of analyzer installation

Printer Printer with the driver corresponding to the operational software

Backup System Flash memory, etc.

*to recognize file system in OS

*connectable to USB, IEEE1394

Others Keyboard, mouse, and PS2 compatible barcode reader

 Make sure that the external storage device will not cause any system failure
from virus, etc. We do not guarantee any system failure caused by the
computer virus.

 Do not install or use other application software on the operational PC. We do


not guarantee the system performance under other application installation.

21
Foreword

4.6 List of installed software


A. List of software installed on operational PC

Program Name Program No. Usage

User interface 2550534XXX User Interface for the system

*”XXX" indicates software number.

B. List of software installed on the analyzer

Program Name Program No. Usage

Unit Main 2550535XXX Handle the mechanical movement

Unit LIQ 2550537XXX Handle liquid level detection

Unit DTR 2550536XXX Handle the work of detector unit

*”XXX" indicates software number.

C. Check program version No.

System (F9) > Versions


Program version numbers can be checked in this screen.

22
Foreword

4.7 System

23
Foreword

5. Handling of barcode reader (option: Sample barcode reader)


5.1 Specifications
 Class 2 laser product

 Emission wavelength: 650nm

 Maximum output: 1.0mW

5.2 Safety precautions


 Do not look laser beam from barcode reader.

 Do not expose human body to laser beam for a long time.

 Do not dismount the analyzer.

 Do not remove the covers. The adjustment of the barcode readers will be
performed by our approved service representative.

 Any operations on controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures


other than instructed in this manual may cause hazardous radiation.

Laser beam from the sample barcode reader is exposed in the above arrow direction
during operation.

24
Foreword

6. Statement for EMC requirement


Emission compliance

 This equipment has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A. In


domestic environment it may cause radio interference, in which case, you may
need to take measures to mitigate the interference.

25
Chapter 1: Overview

Chapter 1 Overview

1.1 General
The analyzer is a desktop fully automated clinical chemistry analyzer with throughput
of 270 tests per hour. Perform operation by connecting to an external operational PC
and print out the measurement results from a printer. This analyzer enables to
connect to a host computer when needed (ASTM Protocol capable).

Seventy-two cuvettes, where the samples are reacted with reagents, are located on the
Incubation reaction unit (IRU), the inside of which is kept at 37ºC constantly. After
mixing reagent and sample in the cuvette in the Incubation reaction unit, perform
absorbance measurement for the reaction liquid every 13 seconds. Wavelength(s) (to
a maximum of 2 wavelengths) used for a measurement can be chosen from 12
pre-specified wavelengths.

The sample tray is detachable and can accommodate maximum 40 sample tubes and
10 cup-holders. The reagent tray is also detachable and can accommodate maximum
50 bottles. The Reagent container has a cooling function to keep a constant
temperature (8 - 15ºC).
Barcode readers for reagent and sample are available to be mounted (as option).

Figure 1.1-1

1-1
Chapter 1: Overview

1.2 Appearance

Figure 1.2-1

Figure 1.2-2

1-2
Chapter 1: Overview

Figure 1.2-3

Figure 1.2-4

1-3
Chapter 1: Overview

1.3 Built-in Units


1.3.1 Function for each unit

Figure 1.3-1

Figure 1.3-2

1-4
Chapter 1: Overview

Figure 1.3-3

Function for each unit is as follows.

1. Incubation reaction unit


This unit is regulated at 37±0.1ºC to promote reacting reaction liquid.
Total 72 cuvettes are available to be loaded.

2. Detector unit
Measures the absorbance of the reaction liquid during reaction process.
This disperses the light from the halogen lamp as a source of light with a
grading method and measures 12 wavelengths at one time.

3. Sample pipette unit


Aspirates a sample from the Sample container and dispenses it into the cuvette
in the Incubation reaction unit or into the ISE unit. After dispensing the sample,
the pipette is cleaned at the trough after use.

4. Reagent pipette unit


Aspirates a reagent in the Reagent container and dispenses it into the cuvette in
Incubation reaction unit. After dispensing the reagent, the pipette is cleaned at
the trough after use.

5. Stirrer unit
It is paddle-type stirrer to mix the reagent and sample within the cuvette .
For stirring speed, select from 5 levels (low to fastest).

6. Washing unit
Cleans the cuvettes after use.

7. Sample container
Accommodates sample tubes or cups.
It enables to hold 40 sample tubes and 10 sample cups (max.). A barcode
reader (option) allows sample identification from the barcode labels on the
sample tubes.

1-5
Chapter 1: Overview

8. Reagent container
Holds 50 reagent bottles (max.). It is refrigerated at 8-15ºC when the analyzer
is ON. A barcode reader (option) allows reagent identification from the
barcode labels on the reagent bottles.

9. Sample pump unit


Aspirates and dispenses a sample or purified water by moving its plungers up
and down.

10. Reagent pump unit


Aspirates and dispenses a reagent or purified water by moving its plungers up
and down.

11. Wash pump unit


Aspirates and dispenses the wash solution or purified water by moving its
plungers up and down in the Washing unit.

12. Supply water unit


Supplies purified water or wash solution to each unit, and discha rges the
wastewater into the external tank.

13. Trough unit


Cleans the sample pipette, the reagent pipette, or the Stirrer unit.

14. Subtank unit


Supplies purified water to each syringe after removing air bubbles in the water.

15. External tanks


Each tank stores purified water or wash solution to use or wastewater
generated from operation.

1-6
Chapter 1: Overview

Here are optional units.

16. ISE unit


Measures the concentration of sodium (Na), potassium (K) and chloride (CI)
contained in serum, plasma, or urine using ion electrodes.

17. Barcode reader (BCR) for reagent and sample


Reads the barcode labels on the sample tubes or reagent bottles.

18. Clot detection sensor unit


Helps to detect any clogs in sample pipette. It is installed in Sample syringe.

19. Degassing unit


Removes air bubbles in the purified water for stable measurement results.

20. External tank sensors


Detects the liquid level within each tank and sends the report to the operational
PC.

1-7
Chapter 1: Overview

1.3.2 Unit description


Unit Abbreviation Unit name Abbreviation Sub-unit name
Analyzer CHS CHaSsis unit FRM FRaMe
CVR CoVeR
PSU Power Supply Unit
CNU CoNtrol Unit
RTB Reaction Table Block IRU Incubation Reaction Unit
DTR DeTectoR unit
WU Washing Unit
MIX MIXing stirrer unit MIX1 MIXing stirrer unit 1
MIX2 MIXing stirrer unit 2
PT PipeTte unit SPT Sample PipeTte unit
RPT Reagent PipeTte unit
TR TRough unit
ASP Auto Sampler Unit
RCU Reagent Container Unit
PP PumP unit SPP Sampling PumP unit
RPP Reagent PumP unit
WPP Wash PumP unit
SUBTK SUB TanK unit
SWU Supply Water Unit
STK System water TanK unit
External WTK Waste TanK unit
tanks
Option ISE Ion Selectivity Electrode
unit
RCU_BCR BarCode Reader
ASP_BCR BarCode Reader
DGU DeGassing Unit
CDS Clot Detection Sensor
ETS External Tank Sensor

1-8
Chapter 2: Unit description

Chapter 2 Unit description


Here is described on each unit of this clinical chemistry analyzer.

The following are structurally similar units. Once you understand one unit, you easily
understand the other.

 Stirrer unit: MIX1 and MIX2

 Pipette unit: SPT and RPT

Note that figures illustrated in this chapter are drastically simplified for broad
understanding.

See also
Chapter 14 “Electrical connections” Electrical connections such as PC boards,
sensors, and motors
Chapter 15 “Fluidic System Diagram” Fluidic connections such as tubes, pumps,
and valves
Chapter 16 “Sensor List” Lists up functions of each sensor

2-1
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.1 Chassis unit (CHS)


2.1.1 Frame (FRM)
A. Functions

The CHS has the following functions.

 Houses the PC boards which are not installed in other units.

 Releases heat generated inside the analyzer.

 Absorbs any vibration generated in operating each unit.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation


Frame Houses the PC boards which are not installed in other units. It is made
of a three-layer structure.
Leak Sensor Installs the middle layers at the right and left sides of the CHS to detect
leakage.
F-LED PCB Two LED condition displays.
Left LED (orange): light ON when the main power is ON
Right LED (green): light ON when the analyzer is in ready mode.
CHS fan Implements a forced air-cooling process inside the CHS. This fan has a
function that detects a rotation stopping.
MAIN-DRV Gives each stepping motor rotary movement (except ASP and RCU).
PCB Also gives the cuvette table heating.
Gives each solenoid valve rotation in the PP and the DGU. Also gives
the SWU, the subtank, and the DGU pumping.
Turns the DTR fan ON or OFF.
Turns the CHS fan ON or OFF.
Performs interlock in the SPT rotary motor.
Transmits each signal from the IRU temperature sensor, the exte rnal
tank sensors, the leak sensor, the subtank sensor, and the fan stop
sensor.
IRU-CN1 Detects liquid level of the PT and the WU.
PCB Transmits the signal from each sensor of the PT, the WU, the MIX, the
IRU, the SPP, the WPP, and TR (Trough chambers). (The signal from
the RPP transmits to the CNT-CN PCB.)

2-2
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.1-1

Figure 2.1-2

2-3
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.1.2 Cover (CVR)


A. Functions

The CVR has the following functions.

 Prevents foreign particles, dusts, etc. from entering the analyzer.

 Prevents unwanted outside light which is harmful to the measurem ent.

 Protects human body from the moving parts of the analyzer.

 Prevents leak of the laser light from the sample BCR (option).

B. Components

Components Function and Operation


Mosaic Consists of 4 plates (as a set) that divide upper and lower parts.
plates Provides the protective dent in the operating area of the PT and the
MIX to avoid any touch with fingers.
For Mosaic-DTR: For lamp and cuvette replacement installed on the lamp
maintenance case. Fixes at the one point to easily remove it.
Mosaic-ISE: For ISE Calibrator replacement installed on the ISE
Calibrator. Fixes at one point to easily remove it.
Front panel Protects the front side of the analyzer.
Side Panel L Protects the left side of the analyzer. Provides air vents with dustproof
air filters to cool the RCU Peltier. For syringe tip replacement.
Side panel R Protects the right side of the analyzer. Provides an air vent with
dustproof air filter. For replacement of syringe tip and ISE electrodes
(option).
Rear panel Protects the rear of the analyzer.
Top cover Prevents operators from any contacts at hazardous parts during
measurement. Visual check is available for internal operating
conditions when the top cover is closed.

2-4
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.1-3

Figure 2.1-4

2-5
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.1.3 Power supply unit (PSU)


A. Functions

AC power is supplied to the internal power supply pack via the noise filter and the
power switch. The power supply pack converts the AC power to required DC power (5V,
12V, or 24V) and supplies it to each unit. AC power input range is within 100V to 240V
to meet the voltage variation by countries.

When the power switch is ON, only the power (12V) for the RCU Peltier module (24V2)
and the ISE and the power (5V) for the CNU are supplied. When operational software
starts up by the control unit, the power (24V) for the motors and heaters and the power
(12V) for the halogen lamp are supplied.

Types of Power supply Immediately after Ready


power ON mode
Power for Peltier module(24V2) ON ON
Power for Control unit(5V) ON ON
Power for ISE unit(12V) ON ON
Power for Motors/Heaters (24V1) OFF ON
Power for Halogen lamp (12V) OFF ON

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

AC Power AC Power ON/OFF (100V to 240V)

switch

Fuse holder Houses overcurrent protection fuses for safety.

Inlet socket For connecting to the AC power cord.

Noise filter Protects any noises or radiations through the AC line.

Power supply Generates DC power for internal need from AC power provided outside. Mounts two types

pack of power supply below.

1. Multi-slot type (PS1)

(+5V) Control unit

(+12V) Halogen lamp

(+24V1) Motors (except ASP and RCU), heaters, and pumps

Available to switch ON/OFF from control unit for solenoid valves.

(+24V2) Peltier, CHS fan, and motors (ASP and RCU)

2. PC board type (PS2)

(+12V) ISE (option)

PSU fan Cools off the power supply pack (multi-slot type). Has a function that detects fan stopping.

2-6
Chapter 2: Unit description

POWER-CN Controls inrush current and lighting voltage limitation of the halogen lamp.

PCB

Figure 2.1-5

2-7
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.1.4 Control unit (CNU)


A. Functions

The CNU houses the CNT-IBM PCB and the CNT-CN PCB and controls the analyzer
itself.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

CNT-IBM Controls the operation (measurement data/each sensor results/reading mclock, etc./each

PCB calculation method) and performs Ethernet communication with the operational PC.

CF card: stores OS and control programs running under CNT-IBM PCB.

CNT-CN PCB Relays each signal between CNT-IBM PCB and each of the PC boards.

Figure 2.1-6

2-8
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.2 Reaction table block (RTB)


2.2.1 Incubation reaction unit (IRU)
A. Functions

Holds 72 semi-disposable cuvettes on the cuvette table and rotates the table to bring
the requested cuvette to the SPT (RPT) dispensing position where the SPT (RPT)
dispenses sample (reagent) into the cuvette.
To promote the incubation (reaction between sample and reagent), the cuvette table is
heated.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Cuvette Table Holds 72 cuvettes. The table is kept at 37 ± 0.1℃ with the heater to promote the

reaction between sample and reagent.

At initialization, the cuvette table is driven to bring the cuvette #1 to the reagent dispensing

position.

Cuvette The cuvettes are made of resin that can pass light from the halogen lamp.

Length of light path: 5mm

Volume (max.): 580µL

Volume (min.): 100µL

IRU Motor Stepping motor. Gives rotation to the cuvette table.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position of the cuvette table (The zero -position

indicates the state when the cuvette # 1 comes to the R1 reagent dispensing position.)

Rotary Detects the rotational position of the IRU. This enables the DTR to perform photometric

encoder measurement synchronizing the IRU rotation.

Heater Three silicone rubber heaters are attached to the cuvette table for keeping the table warm.

TSP PCB Temperature sensors. This sensor is attached to the cuvette table and measures

temperature of the table. This is for controlling the incubation (reaction) liquid inside the

cuvettes kept at 37±0.1°C. A sensor is installed on each of the three divided heaters to

measure individually. Three heaters in total are attached to the analyzer.

Thermal Prevents the IRU from overheat. When the temperature exceeds 76ºC, the fuse blowout

fuses leads to stop the power supply to the heaters. A fuse is installed on each of the three

divided heaters. Three fuses in total are attached to the analyzer.

Slip ring Relays the heater’s power of the cuvette table and temperature sensor signals.

IRU-CN2 Relays the signals from the heater’s power and the temperature sensors on the rotating

PCB IRU to the MAIN-DRV PCB.

2-9
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.2-1

Figure 2.2-2

2-10
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.2.2 Detector unit (DTR)


A. Functions

The DTR measures the absorbance change of the reaction solution that indicates
incubation (reaction) process in a cuvette. The light from the halogen lamp passes
through the heat-ray absorbing filter, is condensed by the lens. The transmissive light
through a cuvette hits the mirror to change its direction by 90 degree. After passing
through the imaging lens and the grating slot, it is dispersed by the grating mirror and
measured the absorbance in the 12 wavelengths at one time. While the IRU rotates
one cycle, the DTR measures the absorbance of 72 cuvettes at one time and outputs
the result data (72 cuvettes × 12 wavelengths) to the CNU.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Halogen lamp This is a light source used for measuring the absorbance of the reaction mixture.

Power consumption: 20W, Operating voltage: 12.0V (operating)/11.4V (standby)

Grating Disperses the light passing through a cuvette with its different reflection angles by

mirror wavelengths.

PD-AMP2 Receives the light dispersed by the grating mirror as the photodiodes by wavelengths.

PCB

PD-AMP1 Converts and amplifies photocurrent of the PD-AMP2 PCB into voltage.

PCB

DTR fan Cools the heat of the halogen lamp.

AD-MPX PCB Amplifies light-receiving signals by electronic volume value set at each wavelength, and

converts them from analog to digital.

DET-CPU Controls the operation of the DTR. Transmits the measurement data to the CNU.

PCB

2-11
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.2-3

Figure 2.2-4

Figure 2.2-5

2-12
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.2.3 Washing unit (WU)


A. Functions

The WU consists of 4 pairs of drain and supply nozzles (WU1 to WU4) and 1 wipe
nozzle (WU5). After measurement, discharge the reaction liquid in the cuvette and
rinse inside the cuvette off with wash solution or purified water.

Stage 1: WU1: aspirates and discharges reaction liquid (drain nozzle) -> supplies
wash solution (supply nozzle)
Stage 2: WU1: aspirates and discharges wash solution (drain nozzle) -> supplies
wash solution (supply nozzle)
Stage 3: WU2: aspirates and discharge wash solution (drain nozzle) -> supplies
purified water (supply nozzle)
Stage 4: WU3: aspirates and discharges purified water (drain nozzle) -> supplies
wash solution (supply nozzle)
WU2: aspirates and discharges wash solution (drain nozzle)
Stage 5: WU3: supplies wash solution (supply nozzle)
Stage 6: (Presoaking in wash solution)
Stage 7: WU4: aspirates and discharge wash solution (drain nozzle) -> supplies
purified water (supply nozzle)
Stage 8: WU4: aspirates and discharge purified water (drain nozzle) -> supplies
purified water (supply nozzle)
Stage 9: (Presoaking in purified water at the Stage 7 -> performs water blank
measurement)
Stage 10: (Presoaking in purified water at the Stage 7 -> performs water blank
measurement)
Stage 11: WU5: discharges purified water and wipe the cuvette (water blank
measurement -> wipe nozzle)
Stage 12: WU5: discharges purified water and wipe the cuvette (wipe nozzle)

Each of WU1 to WU4 is equipped with a liquid level sensor to prevent the overflow of
the wastewater in the cuvette by the discharging and supplying proced ure.

2-13
Chapter 2: Unit description

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Supply Installed in each of WU1 to WU4 (total 4 supply nozzles). Supplies wash solution or

nozzle purified water into cuvettes while moving upward.

Drain nozzle Installed in each of WU1 to WU4 (total 4 drain nozzles). Aspirates and discharge reaction

liquid or wash solution in cuvettes while moving downward. It also functions as electrodes

for the remaining liquid detection sensor.

Wipe nozzle Installed in the WU5. A wipe tip is equipped at the tip of the nozzle to wipe inside the

cuvette.

WU motor Stepping motor. Gives up-and-down movement to the nozzle.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Detects the vertical zero position (the upper limit).

WU-SEN This sensor detects the remaining volume of the cuvette in the WU 1 to WU4 after

PCB aspiration and discharging procedure. Detects the remaining volume by monitoring

capacitance of drain nozzle equipped in WU1 to WU4.

WU-CN PCB Relays the signals between the SENSA PCB and the WU-SEN PCB.

Figure 2.2-6

2-14
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.3 Stirrer unit (MIX)


2.3.1 Stirrer unit 1 (MIX1) and Stirrer unit 2 (MIX2)
A. Functions

After sample and reagent are dispensed into a cuvette, the paddle -type stirrer comes
down into the cuvette and stirs the mixture by rotating so that reaction may progress
evenly. The MIX consists of two mixing stirrers: MIX1 for R1 reagent and MIX2 for R2
reagent. The stirrer is cleaned at the trough with purified water after every use. At
initialization, the stirrer is in the position for washing in the trough.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Stirrer Comes down into a cuvette and stirs the reaction mixture in the cuvette evenly.

MIX_K motor Stepping motor. Rotates the stirrer.

Stirring speed: 5 levels (slow to fastest)

MIX_U motor Stepping motor. Gives up-and-down movement to the stirrer.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. The sensor detects the stirrer is positioned at the trough.

Figure 2.3-1

2-15
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.4 Pipette unit (PT)


2.4.1 Sample Pipette unit (SPT)
A. Functions

The SPP in this unit aspirates and dispenses samples and others in the ASP, IRU, and
ISE. The pipette is cleaned in the SPT trough after use. At initialization, the pipette is
placed in the washing position in the trough.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

SPT_U motor Stepping motor. Gives up-and-down movement to the pipette.

SPT_R motor Stepping motor. Gives horizontal rotation to the pipette.

Pipette Performs vertically and horizontally rotation by the SPT_U and SPT_R motors. The

aspirating and dispensing is performed by the SPP.

SENSA PCB Rotational zero-position sensor:

(Rotation) Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position for the rotation (the position where the

pipette dispenses a sample onto a cuvette in the IRU).

SENSA PCB Vertical zero-position sensor (upper limit):

(Vertical) Photo interrupter. Detects the up-and-down zero position (the upper limit).

SEN-LL/DL PCB Liquid level sensor:

The pipette itself functions as a sensor. Detects that the tip of the pipette comes into

the sample liquid. When the sensor detects the pipette insertion, the SPT_U motor

stops, and then begins pipette aspiration and dispensing. Insertion of the tip of the

pipette into liquid is detected by a change of capacitance.

Lower limit sensor:

Photo interrupter. Normally the gobo of the pipette rests in the photo interrupter and

the photo interrupter is OFF. When the pipette tip reaches the bottom of a sample tube,

the gobo of the pipette is lifted up, resulting that the photo interrupter goes ON. This

sensor is used for protection of the pipette. When the sensor output turns ON, the

SPT_U motor stops.

MOTOR-SEN-CN Synthesizes the signals of each sensor and each motor and relays to other units.

PCB

2-16
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.4-1

2-17
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.4.2 Reagent Pipette unit (RPT)


A. Functions

The RPP in this unit aspirates reagent or others in the RCU and dispenses it into the
cuvette in the IRU. This also dispenses purified water for washing cuvette in the IRU.
The used pipette is washed at the RPT 1 or 2 trough. At initialization, the pipette is
placed at the washing position in the trough.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

RPT_U motor Stepping motor. Gives up-and-down movement to the pipette.

RPT_R motor Stepping motor. Gives horizontal movement to the pipette.

Pipette The RPT makes vertical, horizontal, and rotary movement by the RPT_U and the

RPT_R motors. The aspirating and dispensing is performed by the RPP.

SENSA PCB Rotational zero-position sensor:

(Rotation) Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position for the rotation (the position where the

pipette dispenses a reagent into a cuvette in the IRU).

SENSA PCB Vertical zero-position sensor (upper limit):

(Vertical) Photo interrupter. The sensor on this PCB detects the up-and-down zero position

(the upper limit).

SEN-LL/DL PCB Liquid level sensor:

The pipette itself functions as a sensor. Detects that the tip of the pipette comes

into the reagent liquid. When the sensor detects the pipette insertion, the RPT_U

motor stops, and then begins pipette aspirating and discharging. Detects the

insertion of the tip of the pipette into liqui d by a change of capacitance.

Lower limit sensor:

Photo interrupter. Normally the gobo of the pipette rests in the photo interrupter

and the photo interrupter is OFF. When the pipette tip reaches the bottom of a

reagent bottle, the gobo of the pipette is lifted up, resulting that the photo

interrupter goes ON. This sensor is used for protection of the pipette. When the

sensor output turns ON, the RPT_U motor stops.

MOTOR-SEN-CN Synthesizes the signals from each sensor and each motor and relays to other

PCB units.

2-18
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.4-2

2-19
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.5 Trough unit (TR)


A. Functions

The TR has the following functions:

Trough

1. To dispose of dummy that is not used for measurement in the pipette (SPT and
RPT).

2. To dispose of the washing water inside the pipette (SPT and RPT).

3. To wash the surface of the SPT and the RPT pipettes and the MIX1 and the MIX
2 stirrers with purified water, and to dispose of the waste.

Trough chamber

1. The storage of waste from the trough.

2. The storage of the dew condensation water generating inside the RCU. The
stored waste sends to the drain system for disposal.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Trough Total 4 troughs are placed at the operational area of the each pipette (SPT and RPT) and

each stirrer (MIX1 and MIX2). The surface of the SPT and the RPT pipettes can be washed

with purified water without lowering the pipettes.

Trough Stores the waste from the PT and the MIX troughs and the dew condensatio n water from

chamber the RCU, and sends it to the external tanks. Detects an overflow by the float sensor.

Figure 2.5-1

2-20
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.5-2

2-21
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.6 Sample container unit (ASP)


A. Functions

The Sample container unit (ASP) holds 40 sample tubes and 10 sample cups. It rotates
its sample tray to bring a requested sample to the SPT aspiration position.
The sample position # is marked on the tray and the SPT starts aspiration from the
sample mounted in the sample position #1.
The sample tray rotates one position at a time during operation. If any rerun is required,
it moves the requested sample to the dispensing position.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Outer tray Removable from the sample tray. The tray can hold up to 40 sample tubes. (outer layer: 20

tubes, inner layer: 20 tubes) Since the barcode reader (BCR) is equipped at the outside of

the ASP, the barcode label on the sample needs to be faced outward.

Inner tray Removable from the sample tray. The tray can hold up to 10 sample cups. No reading

available by the BCR.

Hall sensor Detects the ASP lid condition, open/close. A hall sensor is equipped at each lid of the

normal samples and the emergency sample (total 2 sensors).

Line interrupt Detects the ASP lid condition, open/close.

switch

ASP motor Stepping motor. Rotates the sample tray and moves the requested sample tube (normal

sample) or the sample cup (calibrator) to the SPT aspiration position.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position of the sample tray. (The zero-position indicates

the state when sample position # 16 is at the sample aspiration position.)

Barcode Identifies samples by reading barcode labels attached to the sample tubes.

reader

(CCD/laser)

(option)

2-22
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.6-1

Figure 2.6-2

2-23
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.7 Reagent container unit (RCU)


A. Functions

The RCU holds up to 50 reagent bottles and rotates to move the requested reagent to
the RPT aspiration position.
The data read from the BCR (option) sends to the CNU to save the reagent position
and its content.
The RCU is cooled by the Peltier modules and the reagents inside are kept at the
temperature 8 to 15℃.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Reagent Tray The reagent tray is detachable and can accommodate up to 50 bottle s:

(Outer: 25 reagent 20mL-bottles, Inner: 25 reagent 70mL-bottles.)

Since the BCR is equipped at the outside of the RCU, the barcode label on the reagent

bottle needs to be faced outward.

Hall sensor Detects the RCU lid condition, open/close.

Peltier module Cools off the RCU with two Peltier modules, and keeps inside the container at a

temperature of 8 to 15°C. The Peltier module itself is cooled by fan.

Cooler fan for A fan used to cool off the radiation fin for Peltier module. Since each of the Peltier

Peltier module modules has one fan, total 2 fans are equipped. This fan has a function that detects a

rotation stopping.

TSP PCB Monitors the temperature inside of the RCU. Based on the information of the

temperature, the RCU drives the Peltier modules to keep 8 to 15°C inside of the RCU.

Heater Defogs the BCR reading window glass. Connecting to the heater, stops the power supply

to the heater if the temperature reaches 75ºC.

RCU motor Stepping motor. Rotates the reagent tray and moves the requested reagent to the RPT

aspiration position.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Detects the rotational zero position of the reagent tray. (The

zero-position indicates the state when reagent position # 1 i s at the reagent dispensing

position.)

ASP/RCU-DRV Drives the motors of the ASP and the RCU.

PCB Drives the Peltier modules for cooling.

Relays the signals from BCR (ASP and RCU).

Relay the signal from the ISE.

Connects the power supply to the heater.

Barcode Identifies reagents by reading the barcode labels on the reagent bottles.

reader (BCR)

(option)

2-24
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.7-1

2-25
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.7-2

2-26
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.8 Pump unit (PP)


2.8.1 Sample pump unit (SPP)
A. Functions

The SPP consists of the sample syringe (SPPS) and the wash syringe (SPPW).
This unit performs aspiration and dispensing of a sample or purified water through
up-and-down movement of a plunger. Since a motor is installed for each of the SPPS
and the SPPW, each syringe operates independently.

B. Components
Components Function and Operation

Plunger Two plungers (for SPPS and SPPW) are equipped. Perform up-and-down movement

independently by its motor.

Syringe Two syringes (for SPPS and SPPW) are equipped.

SPP motor Stepping motor. Two motors (for SPPS and SPPW) are equipped.

Gives each of the plunger up-and-down movement independently.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Two sensors (for SPPS and SPPW) are equipped. Detects the upper

limit position of each plunger.

SPP-EV Built-in in the sample syringe. Piping as follows.

Solenoid COM: SPPW

valve NO: Subtank

NC: SPPS

Clot detection Helps to detect the syringe clog level with the pressure sensor.

sensor PRE-SEN PCB: equipped with the pressure sensor

(option) PRE-SEN-CN PCB: processes the pressure sensor signals at the sub -CPU and sends it to

the CNU.

2-27
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.8-1

Figure 2.8-2

2-28
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.8.2 Reagent pump unit (RPP)


A. Functions

The RPP consists of the reagent syringe (RPPR) and the wash syringe (RPPW).
This unit performs aspiration and dispensing for reagent and purified water through
up-and-down movement of a plunger. Since a motor is installed for each of the RPPS
and the RPPW, each syringe operates independently.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Plunger Two plungers (for RPPR and RPPW) are equipped. Perform up-and-down movement

independently by its motor.

Syringe Two syringes (for RPPR and RPPW) are equipped.

RPP motor Stepping motor. Two motors (for RPPR and RPPW) are equipped. Gives each of the

plungers up-and-down movement independently.

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Two of up zero-position sensors (for RPPR and RPPW) are equipped.

Detects the upper limit position of each plunger.

RPP-EV Built-in in the wash syringe. Piping as follows.

Solenoid COM: RPPW

valve NO: Subtank

NC: RPPR

2-29
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.8-3

Figure 2.8-4

2-30
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.8.3 Wash pump unit (WPP)


A. Functions

The WPP consists of 4 syringe pumps (two for wash solution and the other two for
purified water) and dispenses it into cuvettes.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Plunger Four plungers are equipped;

Performs up-and-down movement independently by its motor.

Syringe Performs syringe aspirating and dispensing by plunger pumping and connects to

dispensing nozzles of the WU. Supplies wash solution to the WU1 and WU3 and purified

water to the WU2 and the WU4.

WU1 and WU3: wash solution dispensing (volume: 430µL)

WU2: purified water dispensing (volume: 470µL)

WU4: purified water dispensing (volume: 500µL)

WPP motor Performs the syringe aspirating and dispensing of wash solution or purified water by

plunger pumping. Each of the plungers is connected to its motor and operates

simultaneously.

WPP-EV Four solenoid valves are connected to each syringe. Connected to each syringe, performs

Solenoid aspirating and dispensing by switching the valve to the nozzle, the wash solution, or the

valve purified water side. Piping as follows.

The valves connected to each syringe:

COM: Syringe

NO: WU1/3: wash solution tank, WU2/4: subtank

NC: Nozzle

SENSA PCB Photo interrupter. Detects the upper limit position of the plunger. (Starts aspiration of wash

solution or purified water at this position.)

2-31
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.8-5

2-32
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.8.4 Subtank (SUBTK)


A. Functions

The SUBTK stores purified water to remove air bubbles, and sends it to the SPP, the
RPP, and the WPP.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Subtank For purified water storage

Tank capacity: 800ml (high level of liquid detection volume: 655ml)

Float sensor Liquid level sensor

Detects full level by the sensor up-and-down movement.

Limit switch Detects the presence or absence of a tank.

No tank installed: Switch OFF

Drain For drainage of the waste in case of overflow.

Figure 2.8-6

2-33
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.9 Supply water unit (SWU)


A. Functions

The SWU supplies purified water and wash solution and discharges the waste.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Connector to Connector for supplying purified water ×1

external Connector for supplying wash solution ×2

equipment Connector for discharging high conc. wastewater. ×1

Connector for discharging low conc. wastewater. ×1

Diaphragm For supply: 5 pumps installed

pump Supplies purified water to subtank, and each trough of the SPT, the RPT, the MIX1, and

the MIX2.

For waste: 5 pumps installed.

Discharges the waste (WU1 to WU5).

Check valve Total 4 check valves are equipped as connections between each of the supply pumps

and its trough. Prevents reverse flow of purified water supplied to each trough.

Inline filter N Total 4 filters are equipped as connections between the drain nozzles (WU 1 to WU4)

and the drain syringe pumps for the WU. Removes extraneous particles from waste.

Leak sensor Detects liquid leakage.

Figure 2.9-1

2-34
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.10 External tanks


2.10.1 Purified water/wash solution tank unit (STK) and wastewater tank
unit (WTK)
A. Functions

The STK and WTK have the following functions:


* Supply of purified water (system water) and wash solution.
* Storage of wastewater generated from the analyzer.
B. Components
Components Function and Operation

Purified water/ Volume for purified water tank: 20L × 1

wash solution Volume for wash solution tank: 5L × 2

tank

Supply tube 1 tube for purified water tank (Mesh filter installed to prevent any

contaminations)

2 tubes for wash solution tanks (Mesh filters installed to prevent any

contaminations)

Wastewater Volume for high conc. wastewater tank: 10L × 1

Tank Volume for low conc. wastewater tank: 20L × 1

Drain tube 1 for high conc. wastewater tank

1 for low conc. wastewater tank

1 for low conc. wastewater tank from trough chamber

2-35
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.11 Option
2.11.1 ISE unit (ISE)

A. Functions

The ISE is installed on the right side of the analyzer and is used to determine the
concentration of electrolytes (sodium, potassium and chloride) contained in serum,
blood plasma or urine using ion electrodes.
The sample supplied at the SPT is performed measurement automatically.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Ion electrodes Consists of four electrodes, Na+, K+, Cl- and Reference. Measures the

concentration of each of the ions.

Pump tube Controlled by the ISE module. Sends and drains liquids (such as H

solution, L solution, samples, activators, and wash solutions.)

ISE module Controls the pump operation. Measures signals from the ion electrodes and

sends the results.

ISE liquids Six kinds of liquids for the ISE. Each liquid is installed at the designated

position.

L Solution: Cleaning solution for the electrodes. Dispensed by the above

mentioned pumping. It is used for the ISE module calibration. Automatically

dispensed into the ISE every 5 minutes to prevent the electrodes from

drying.

Ref Solution: Cleaning solution exclusively for Reference electrode.

Automatically dispensed into the Reference electrode every 30 minutes in

the similar manner as L solution.

H Solution: Installed inside the ASP. Dispensed into the ISE by the SPT.

Performs measurement twice.

ISE Cleaner: Wash solution exclusively for the ISE. Installed inside the

ASP as well as H solution. Dispensed into the ISE by the SPT.

Etching: Wash solution exclusively for Na electrode. Installed inside the

ASP as well as the ISE cleaner.

Urine Diluent: Used exclusively for diluting a urine sample and installed

inside the RCU. The RPT dispenses it into an IRU cuvette and mixes the

solution. Then dispenses the solution into the ISE by the SPT.

2-36
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.11-1

2-37
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.11.2 Degassing unit (DGU)

A. Functions

This unit enables to remove air bubbles from purified water and sends to the SPP and
the RPP.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

Degasser Removes air and dissolved gases through nonporous, special extra-fine

module silicone, hollow fiber membrane.

Vacuum pump Diaphragm pump. Evacuates the inside of the degasser module.

Solenoid valve Controls vacuum of the degasser module constantly.

Pressure Monitors vacuum of the degasser module.

gauge

Figure 2.11-2

2-38
Chapter 2: Unit description

2.11.3 External tank sensors

A. Functions

This unit enables to monitor liquid level inside the external tank.

B. Components

Components Function and Operation

External tank Holds wash solution tank 1 and 2 that equipped with liquid level senso r for

rack each.

Connectors to liquid lever sensors for the purified water tank and

wastewater tanks installed separately, and to the analyzer as the interface

cable.

Purified water Float sensor. The sensor is inserted inside of the tank to detect the

liquid level remaining amount of water.

sensor ON: 4L or more

OFF: 4L or less

High conc. Float sensor. The sensor is inserted inside of the tank to detect the

wastewater remaining amount of wastewater.

liquid level ON: 9L or more

sensor OFF: 9L or less

Low conc. Float sensor. The sensor is inserted inside of the tank to detect the

wastewater remaining amount of wastewater.

liquid level ON: 18L or more

sensor OFF: 18L or less

Wash solution Photo interrupter. Installed at the lower part of the tank outside and

liquid level monitors the remaining volume of the wash solution.

sensor ON: 300mL or more

OFF: 300mL or less

2-39
Chapter 2: Unit description

Figure 2.11-3

2-40
Chapter 3: PC boards

Chapter 3 PC boards

3.1 General
This chapter explains each PC board in the analyzer.

3.2 Types and Functions of PC Boards


The following list indicates the types and functions of the PC boards.
For the mounting position of the PC boards, refer to Chapter 2.

A. Functions of PC boards

PCB Type Implemented functions and circuits Unit


AD-MPX PCB 25P4105 Amplifies light-receiving signals by electronic DTR

volume value specified by each wavelength, and

converts them from analog to digital.

ASP/RCU-DRV 25P4102 Drives the motors of the ASP and the RCU. RCU

PCB Drives the Peltier modules for cooling. Relays the

BCR signals from the ASP and the RCU. Relays

the signal from the ISE. Connects the power

supply to the heater for BCR window.

CNT-CN PCB 25P4103 Relays signals between the CNT-IBM PCB and CNU

other PCB. Converts RPP sensor signals from

parallel to serial and transmits it to the CNU.

CNT-IBM PCB 25P3521 Controls operation of the analyzer under the CNU

commands of the operational PC with Ethernet.

Transmits measurement results to the operational

PC. CF card is mounted.

DET-CPU PCB 25P3514 Controls operation of the DTR. Transmits the data DTR

to the CNU.

F-LED PCB 25P3528 Displays analyzer status with 2 LED lamps. CHS

IRU_CN1 PCB 25P3510 Converts sensor signals of the units (SPT, RPT, CHS

MIX1/2, WU, IRU, SPP, and WPP) from parallel to

serial and transmits them to the CNU. Detects

overflow in the trough chamber.

IRU_CN2 PCB 25P3218 Relays power for driving the IRU heaters. Relays IRU

temperature sensor signals to the CNU.

3-1
Chapter 3: PC boards

LLED PCB 25P3142 Light emitting board to detect the liquid volume of External tank

(Option) an external tank. sensors

LLRD PCB 25P3141 Light receiving board to detect the liquid volume External tank

(Option) of an external tank. sensors

MAIN-DRV PCB 25P4101 Drives the motors of each unit. CHS

Inputs sensor signals from the subtank.

MOTOR-SEN-CN 25P3513 Relays driving signals of the stepping motors RPT

PCB from the SPT and the RPT. SPT

Relays sensor signals from the SPT and the RPT.

PD-AMP1 PCB 25P4104 Converts and amplifies photocurrent of the DTR

PD-AMP2 PCB into voltage.

PD-AMP2 PCB 25P3517 Receives light by photodiode array. DTR

POWER-CN PCB 25P3520 Controls voltage of the halogen lamp. PSU

PRE-SEN-CN 25P3535 Detects whether the SPT dispensing works SPP

PCB (Option) properly from the PRE_SEN PCB signals (SPT

clog level detection).

PRE-SEN PCB 25P3536 Detects SPT clog level. SPP

(Option)

SEN_LL/DL PCB 25P3716 Detects the liquid level and low limit level of the RPT, SPT

reagent or the sample.

SENSA PCB 25P3207 Detects position through photo interrupter. ASP, RCU, IRU,

MIX1/2, RPT,

SPT, SPP, RPP,

WPP, WU

TSP PCB 25P2015 Detects temperature. IRU, RCU

WU_CN PCB 25P3527 Relays sensor signals of the WU. WU

WU_SEN PCB 25P3512 Detects remaining volume in the cuvette by the WU

WU nozzle.

3-2
Chapter 3: PC boards

3.3 Hierarchy of major PCB

Figure 3.3-1

3-3
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Chapter 4 Unpacking and installation

4.1 Installation site


A. Dimensions

1. Dimensions:
870mm (w) × 670mm (d) × 625mm (h) (not including the projection part)

2. Mass:
120kg (Max.)

B. Environmental condition

 Instrument operating temperature: from +15°C to +30°C, with a relati ve


humidity of 45% to 85% maximum, without condensation.
 Do not expose the analyzer to direct sunlight or water splash.

 Install the analyzer in a place where there is no dust or vibration.

 Do not expose the analyzer to direct heat or cool air from air conditione r, air
hole of heater, etc.

 Avoid areas where the analyzer may be adversely affected by atmospheric


pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt
or sulfur, etc.

 Do not install the analyzer at a place adjacent to the storage room of


chemicals or a place where any gas is likely to be generated.

C. Power requirements

 AC 100 to 120V, 50/60Hz, 6.5A (Max.)

 AC 200 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 3.3A (Max.)

D. Operational PC

Refer to each operator’s manual for power supply voltage and power cons umption.

E. Operational display and printer

Refer to each operator’s manual for power supply voltage and power consumption.

4-1
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

F. Water supply and drainage

 Capacity: 5L/h
 Connection tube:

Type of water supply and drainage Tube type Remarks


Purified water supply Purified water Silicon tube Analyzer – Purified (system)
water tank (20L)
High conc. wastewater Drain from WU (drain nozzle (No. 1 Silicon tube Analyzer – High conc.
and 2)) wastewater tank (10L)
Low conc. wastewater Drain from WU (drain nozzle (No. Silicon tube Analyzer – Low conc.
3, 4, and 5)) wastewater tank (20L)
Trough Silicon tube
Wash solution 1 supply Wash solution 1 Silicon tube Analyzer-
Wash solution1 tank (5L/2L)
Wash solution 2 supply Wash solution 2 Silicon tube Analyzer-
Wash solution2 tank (5L/2L)

4-2
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.2 Unpacking and installation


4.2.1 Unpacking
1. Cut the 4 bands binding a cardboard box with a cutter.

Figure 4.2-1

2. Remove the top lid of the cardboard box.

Figure 4.2-2

3. Remove the top protective cushion part on the top.

Figure 4.2-3

4-3
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4. Remove the 4 M8 bolts (WAF: 13mm, 2 at each right and left side) on the sleeve
side of the cardboard box.

Figure 4.2-4

5. Take out external tanks on the accessories box.

Figure 4.2-5

6. Lift the sleeve part of the cardboard box and remove it. .

Figure 4.2-6

4-4
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

7. Take out accessories box and external tanks.

Figure 4.2-7

8. Pull out the two holding plates on the both right and left sides.

Figure 4.2-8

9. Remove the polyester cover from the analyzer.

Figure 4.2-9

10. Remove the caps and the tapes at the tube connections.

4-5
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.3 Installation
Four persons or more are required to carefully lift and carry the analyzer from the
palette holding the grip areas on the bottom of the analyzer and place it at the
designated place.
The installation table or workbench should be solid enough to keep the analyzer (it
weighs approx. 120kg) stable.

Figure 4.3-1

4-6
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.3.2 Dismounting fixing tapes and protective material


1. Remove all the fixing tapes on the top cover.

Figure 4.3-2

2. Open the top cover and remove all the fixing tapes on the lids of the Sample
container and the Reagent container.

Figure 4.3-3

3. Remove the protective material attaching on the inner side of the lids of the
Sample container and the Reagent container.

Figure 4.3-4

Figure 4.3-5

4-7
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.3.3 Dismounting protective material


The movable parts (such as sample pipette, reagent pipette, stirrer unit 1, stirrer unit 2,
and washing unit) are fixed with protective material to avoid damage s during
transportation.

Figure 4.3-6

Follow the procedure below to dismount the protective material for transportation use.

1. Reagent pipette and Stirrer unit 2


The reagent pipette and the stirrer unit 2 are fixed with the common protective
material.
 Remove the 2 fixing tapes and remove the protective material.

 Hold the shaft part and lift the reagent pipette. (DO NOT hold the arm part.)

 Carefully move the reagent pipette to the front without hitting the tip of the
reagent pipette at the trough or the work panel.

 Lift up the protective material and remove it.

 After removing the protective material, move the reagent pipette to the trough
position.

Figure 4.3-7

4-8
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

2. Sample pipette and Stirrer unit 1


The sample pipette and the stirrer unit 1 are fixed with the common protective
material.

 Remove the 2 fixing tapes and remove the protective material.

 Hold the shaft part and lift the sample pipette. (DO NOT hold the arm part.)
 Carefully move the sample pipette to the front without hitting the tip of the
sample pipette at the trough or the work panel.

 Lift up the protective material and remove it.


 After removing the protective material, move the sample pipette to the ISE
unit.

Figure 4.3-8

3. Washing unit

 Remove the fixing tape for the Washing unit.

 Pull out the protective material.

 After removing the protective material, move the sample pipette to the trough
position.

Figure 4.3-9

 When removing the protective material, pay attention not to hit at other parts
such as the sample pipette, the reagent pipette, and the stirrer unit.

 For the protective materials, keep and store them together wit h the
accessories appropriately.
 When transferring the analyzer to some other place, make sure to reattach
the protective material appropriately.

4-9
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.3.4 Dismounting cuvette dustproof cover


The cuvettes on the incubation reaction unit are covered with the cuvett e dustproof
cover (made of plastic) to avoid any dust contaminations during transportation. In
installation, remove the cuvette dustproof cover from the incubation reaction unit.

1. Loosen the screw and dismount the Mosaic DTR.

Figure 4.3-10

2. Dismount the cuvette dustproof cover.

 Rotate the incubation reaction unit and remove the fixing tapes for the
cuvette dustproof cover.

 For removing the fixing tapes, lift up the edge of the cuvette dustproof cover
onto the work table and remove the tapes at the several points accordin gly
by rotating the incubation reaction unit. Total 8 pieces of the fixing tapes on
the cuvette dustproof cover.

Figure 4.3-11

3. Mount the Mosaic DTR to the original position.

 Make sure that there are no fixing tapes remained inside of the incubation
reaction unit.

 Keep and store the cuvette dustproof cover together with the accessories
appropriately.

4-10
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.3.5 Level
The analyzer must be installed on the leveled table or workbench. Turn the height
adjustment bolt and perform level adjustment of the analyzer.

1. Open the lid of the sample container and pull out the sample tray.

2. Place the level on the designated position as illustrated below.

Figure 4.3-12

3. Adjust the four height adjustment bolts on the bottom of the analyzer to enter
the air bubble of the level into the center of the level. The height adjustment
bolts is adjusted to 28mm before shipping from factory.

Figure 4.3-13

4. Adjust any of the appropriate height adjustment bolts to adjust the level within
the range 28 to 43mm (from initial height: 28mm).

Figure 4.3-14

4-11
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

 When the height of the height adjustment bolt becomes lower than 28mm,
the Peltier element of the reagent container may cause damages.

4.3.6 Signal cable connection / tubng


After installation, connect the analyzer to the operational PC, the printer, and the
external tanks with connection lines and tubes.

Figure 4.3-15

G. Cable connection

1. Power connection
For power cable connection, apply power supply code (length: 2m) attached to
the analyzer and install a 3-pronged power cable with a ground terminal.

Figure 4.3-16

4-12
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

 The power-supply voltage at shipment: AC100V


When operating with any power voltage other than the indicated voltage , contact
our sales division. Make sure to connect ground wires.

 Plug power code plug directly in the outlet. Using Improper wiring such as
extension code or power strip may cause the fire or malfunction. It also adversely
affects the measurement results.

 Keep the analyzer away from any other water. Prevent exposure to water drops
or rain to cause fire, electric shock, malfunction, or corrosion.

 Avoid to damage on the power code such as scratches or under the heavy
objects. It may cause short-circuits, fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

 Power supply is required AC100V to 120V, 50/60Hz, 6.5A (Max.) for the
analyzer itself.

 Permissible voltage variation: ±10% (Max.)

2. LAN cable connection


Connect the analyzer to the operational PC with an accompanying LAN cable.

3. External Liquid Level Sensors (option)


When applying the external tank sensors (option), connect the external tank
sensors to the connectors for external tank sensors on the analyzer using
accompanying cables for the external tank sensors.

4. Operational PC/PC display or printer (option)

 Refer to each operator’s manual for power supply voltage and power
consumption.

 Refer to the operator's manual and connect the accompanying cables.

4-13
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

H. Tubes

Connect the analyzer to each external tank using each of the accompanying
supply/drain tubes.

 Clean the external tanks


Prior to connecting the tubes to the analyzer, rinse inside of each of the external
tanks (such as Purified water tank (20L), Wash solution1 tank (5L or 2L), and
Wash solution2 tank (5L or 2L)) with purified water thoroughly.

1. Tube connections at the analyzer


There are six connections for the supply/drain tubes at the right side of the
analyzer.

Figure 4.3-17

4-14
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

2. Tubes in standard specification


The following tubes are enclosed in the standard specification.

Two tube types: one for No. 1, 2 and 3 and the other for No. 4, 5, and 6.

 Once each of the tubes No. 1, 2, and 3 is connected, do not change the
connection. If changing the connection, it causes contamination.

4-15
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

3. Tube connections in standard specification


Connect the supply/drain tubes as indicated the figure below.

Figure 4.3-18

Insert a silencer into each tip of the tubes (# 4 and 5 ) of the high conc. waste
and the low conc. waste as shown below.

Figure 4.3-19

 Push each of silencers accompanying in the accessory box into the tube No.
2 for the high conc. waste and No. 3 for the low conc. waste and insert them
into each of the wastewater tanks.

 For drain tubes


(1) Tube length: 100cm
Place the tanks at the designated position to reach the tubes.
(2) Place the wastewater tanks at a level lower than the analyzer.
(3) The drain tubes are placed at the position not parallel to the floor, lower
than the corresponding tanks.
(4) If the tube is too long, cut it to the appropriate length.

4-16
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4. Supply/drain tube and tanks


Check the following points on the connection of the supply/drain tubes.

 The tip of the supply tube is positioned at the bottom of the purified water
tank.
 Enough purified water in the purified water tank

 The tip of the supply tube is positioned at the bottom of each wash solution
tank.
 Enough wash solution in each of the wash solution tank

 The tip of the drain tube is positioned at the upper part of the wastewater
tank and with enough space from the liquid level.
 Enough capacity in the wastewater tank

 Connect tubing appropriately.

Figure 4.3-20

4-17
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

5. Cable connections and tubes with external tank sensors (option)


An external liquid level sensor (option) is available to detect the volume of each
external tank.
When applying the external tank sensors, the supply tubes No. 2 and 3 for wash
solution are changed as indicated the following table. The rest of the tubes are
same as described in standard specifications.

6. Tubes with external tank sensors (option)


When applying the external tank sensor (option), perform tube connections as
indicated in the following figure.

Figure 4.3-21

4-18
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

7. Cable connections with external tank sensors (option)


When applying the external tank sensor (option), perform cable connections as
indicated in the following figure.

Figure 4.3-22

Figure 4.3-23

 The analyzer in standard specification does not have connectors for the
external tank sensors (option).

4-19
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.4 Dye test at the installation


4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent
When performing dye test at the installation, the following reagents and samples are
required as indicated below.
Perform preparation (A) and (B) in the following procedure in advance and ready for
the analyzer installation.

 Validity date for each reagent and sample is 1 month after each preparation.

Test Sample R1 Reagent R2 Reagent


SPTS (A) (B)
RPTS (B) (C)
RPT2S (B) (B) (D)

A. Preparation for (A)

1. Dispense 0.26g (±0.01g) of Amidoblack 10B into a 100mL-measuring flask.

2. Dispense 30µL of TRITON X-100 into the100mL-measuring flask.

3. Add purified water into the measuring flask and make 100mL solution.

4. Stir well to dissolve it.

B. Preparation for (B)

1. Dispense 150µL of TRITON X-100 into a 500mL-measuring flask.

2. Add purified water into the measuring flask and make 500mL solution.

3. Stir well to dissolve it.

C. Preparation for (C)

1. Dispense 2mL of the (A) solution into a 100mL-measuring flask.

2. Add the (B) solution into the measuring flask and make 100mL solution.

3. Stir well to dissolve it.

D. Preparation for (D)

1. Dispense 20mL of the (A) solution into a 100mL-measuring flask.

2. Add the (B) solution into the measuring flask and make 100mL solution.

3. Stir well to dissolve it.

4-20
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5 Prior to measurement


4.5.1 Purified water and wash solution
1. Fill purified water into the purified water tank (20L).

2. Empty the low conc. wastewater tank (20L) and the high conc. wastewater tank
(10L).

3. Prepare a wash solution 1 tank (5L) and a wash solution 2 tank (5L) and fill each
of wash solution 1 and 2 (both diluted to 200 times) for each tank. (Fill 25mL of
each wash solution and 5L of purified water into the tank. Shake the tank well to
dissolve it.)

4. Insert the supply tube for wash solution 1 into the wash solution1 tank and the
supply tube for wash solution 2 into the wash solution2 tank respectively.

5. Insert drain tubes (No. 3 and 4) for the low conc. waste into the low conc.
wastewater tank and a drain tube (No.2) for the high conc. waste into the high
conc. wastewater tank.

6. Insert a supply tube for purified water into the purified water tank.

4-21
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.2 Power ON and log in by Engineer level


For procedure after installation, log in by Engineer level. All screens an d functions in
this operational software are available for this user level.

1. Turn the switch ON at the left side of the analyzer and reboot the operational
PC.

2. Log-in screen appears after rebooting the operational PC.

3. Enter the log-in name and the password. Press [->] key.

 Log-in name: blank

 Password: password for the Engineer (EL) level user

Figure 4.5-1

 The password for EL level user is automatically changed each year.

4. After successfully log-in under the EL level, the [Monitor] screen in the [Run
(F5)] appears.

4-22
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.3 Open channel setting for RCU


1. Select [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.

2. Click on the [Sequence] screen name (white area) at upper -left part of the
screen.

Figure 4.5-2

3. Enter the open channel code for RCU. Press the [ENTER] key.

 The open channel code for RCU is automatically changed each year.

4. Select [System (F9)] > [System Setup 2] screen.

Figure 4.5-3

5. Specify “System setting” area at the right part of the screen as follows:

 Open channel setting: 1 to 60


 Manual inventory addition: Enable

 Reagent volume protection: Disable

6. Click the “Save” icon.

4-23
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

7. Click the “Shutdown” icon. Click the [Login] button in the pop-up message.

Figure 4.5-4

8. Log in by EL level again. (Refer to "4.5.2 Power on and log in by Engineer


level.”)

4.5.4 Prime
1. Select [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.

2. Tick on the “Prime” and enter “10” at the right side of the “Execute” icon. Click
the “Execute” icon.

Figure 4.5-5

 Prior to measurement, fill the analyzer with the purified water and remove the
air bubbles within the tubes completely.

4-24
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.5 Cuvette wash, automatic gain, and water blank measurement


A. Wash cuvette

1. Click the [Wash cuvette] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform cuvette wash.

Figure 4.5-6

B. Automatic gain

Perform automatic gain in 20 minutes or more after the analyzer powered ON.

1. Click the [Automatic Gain] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Performance]
screen. Perform automatic gain.

2. Check that each wavelength at the “Gain” is kept within 8.5 to 9.5 V.

Figure 4.5-7

C. Water blank measurement

1. Click the [Check water blank] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence]
screen. Perform water blank measurement.

Figure 4.5-8

4-25
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

2. Select [Maintenance (F10)] > [Water Blank] screen.

3. Select “340” in “Wave Length" from drop-down menu at the upper-left part of the
screen.

4. Check that the absorbance value of each cuvette is under 5,000mAbs/10 and
not displayed in red.

Figure 4.5-9

4-26
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.6 Reagent registration


1. Select the [System (F9)] > [Reagent Registration] screen. Specify the Reagent
code and the Reagent name as follows. Then click the “Save” icon.

Figure 4.5-10

2. Select the [Run (F5)] > [Inventory] screen.

3. Register the reagent bottle position as follows. Then click the “Save” icon.

 Double-click the reagent name in the Pos. “01” and select “SPTS” from
drop-down menu. Select “R1” as the Reagent Type.

 Double-click the reagent name in the Pos. “02” and select “RPTS” from
drop-down menu. Select “R1” as the Reagent Type.
 Double-click the reagent name in the Pos. “03” and select “RPT2S” from
drop-down menu. Select “R1” as the Reagent Type.

4-27
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.7 Chemistry parameter setting


1. Select [Parameter (F6)] > [Chemistry Parameters 1] screen.

Figure 4.5-11

2. Specify the chemistry parameter setting for the dye test as follows. For every
chemistry parameter setting is done, click the “Save” icon.

SPTS RPTS RPT2S


Method No. 1 2 3
Method name SPTS RPTS RPT2S
Sample type Serum Serum Serum
Assay type End End End
Measuring point 1 Start:7, End:9 Start:45, Start:45,
End:46 End:46
Measuring point 2 Disable Disable Disable
Wave Length 600 600 600
(Prim.)
Wave length (Sec.) Disable Disable Disable
Sample volume (µL) 3.0 30.0 10.0
Reagent (R1) SPTS RPTS SPTS
Reagent (µL) 200 100 180
Reagent (R2) Disable Disable RPT2S
Reagent (µL) (R2) - - 20
Stirring speed (R1) Middle Middle Middle
Stirring speed (R2) - - Middle
Decimal point 0 0 0

4-28
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.8 Calibration setting


1. Select [Calibration (F7)] > [Calibration Registration] screen.

Figure 4.5-12

2. Specify the calibration setting for the dye test as follows. For each calibration
setting is done, click the “Save” icon.

SPTS RPTS RPT2S


Method No. 1 2 3
Calibration type Factor Factor Factor
K 1000 1000 1000

4-29
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.9 Test order registration


1. Select [Run (F5)] > [Test Selection] screen.

Figure 4.5-13

2. Register orders as follows.

 Select “01” at the Start (Pos.) and tick on the “SPTS” on the method list on
the right side of the screen. Select “20” at the “Number” from drop -down
menu and click the “Save” icon.
 Register the following orders as indicated below in the same procedure.

Start Method name Number of


(Pos) measurement
01 SPTS 20
02 SPTS 20
03 RPTS 20
04 RPTS 20
05 RPT2S 20
06 RPT2S 20

4-30
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.5.10 Reagent bottle placement


Set the reagents as follows.

 Place a reagent bottle (70mL) containing 30mL or more of the (B) solution
prepared in “4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent” on the position # 1.
 Place a reagent bottle (70mL) containing 30mL or more of the (C) solution
prepared in “4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent” on the position # 2.

 Place a reagent bottle (70mL) containing 15mL or more of the (D) solution
prepared in “4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent” on the position # 3.

 Open the reagent bottle prior to measurement and close the bottle
immediately after measurement.

4.5.11 Sample placement


Set the samples as follows.

 Place sample cups containing 0.5mL or more of the (A) solution prepared in
“4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent” on the position # 1 and # 2.

 Place sample cups containing 2.0mL or more of the (B) s olution prepared in
“4.4.1 Preparation of sample and reagent” on the position # 3, # 4, # 5, and #
6.

4-31
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.6 Measurement start


1. Close both lids of the Reagent container and the Sample container and click the
“Start” icon in the [RUN (F5)] > [Monitor] screen. Click the [OK] button when the
following pop-up message appears.

Figure 4.6-1

4-32
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.7 Check the measurement results


1. Select [Run (F5)] > [Results] screen.

Figure 4.7-1

2. Select “Normal” in the Sample Category from drop-down menu at the “Search
for” area of the screen.

3. Specify the search dates “From” and “To” from drop-down menu and enter the
“Round No”. When not specifying the search date, remove tick mark at “Enable”.
When not specifying the round no. enter “*”.

4. Select “Monitor” at the Output Result from drop-down menu and click the
“Search” icon.

5. Check that the dye test results are displayed in the screen.

6. Select “File” in the Output Result from drop-down menu.

7. Click the […] button to display the My File Open Dialog box and specify the
folder to be saved.

8. Click the “Search” icon and transfer the data into the specified folder. The data
is saved in csv. format.

9. Sum up the measurement results (the absorbance values of total 20 tests Sum
up the measurement results (the absorbance values of total 120 tests (each 2
running for the SPTS, the RPTS, and the RPT2S tests where N=20) and
calculate the average (AV), the standard deviation (SD), the max. and the min.
values, and the coefficient of variance (CV). When the coefficient of variance
(CV) is within the following acceptable range, the results meet the criteria.
4-33
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

 Criteria:
When applying the Degasser module, SPTS<2.0%, RPTS<1.0%,
RPT2S<1.0%
When not applying the Degasser module, SPTS<2.0%, RPTS<1.0%,
RPT2S<3.0%

10. If the results do not meet the criteria, some malfunction may occur. Check that
the all procedures, setting details, and the analyzer status and perform dye test
again.

4-34
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.8 L3 user account setting


Perform account setting (user name, and password) for L3 level user.

1. Select [Maintenance (F10)] > [Setup Password] screen.

Figure 4.8-1

2. For setting L3 level user account, enter the following.

 User name: CA-270

 Level: L3
 New password: CA-270

 The above setting is not mandatory. If a user prefers another setting, it is


available to change.

3. Click the “Save” icon to create an account.

4. Click the “Shutdown” icon. Click the [Logout] button in the pop-up message.

5. Check that the newly created account is effective to log in from the log -in
screen.

4-35
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Check point Description Details Befo At Comment/remarks


re Install
Insta ation
llatio
n
Printer 150VA
System IRU Stable within
required 37±0.3ºC after
temperature power ON.
RCU 15ºC or less after
power ON.
Others Reagent bottle 70mL bottle and For use of the bottle
size 20ml round bottle for type, inquire clients
R1 and R2. and reagent
manufactures
Sample Tray Sample tube: 12 to For use of sample
16mm in inside tube type, inquire
diameter, 75 to client.
100mm in height.

Dye test results SPTS RPTS RPT2S


1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
Criteria CV<2.0% CV<2.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.0%
(applying
Degassing unit)
Coefficient of
variance (CV)

ISE test results Na K Cl


1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
Criteria CV<1.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.5% CV<1.5% CV<1.2% CV<1.2%
Coefficient of
variance (CV)

4-42
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Software program version


UI Main Unit Main
Unit SPT Unit LIQ
Unit DTR
Unit SPT

4-43
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.9 Ending procedure and clean-up


1. Delete the information that registered for the dye test as needed.

2. Click the “Shutdown” icon. Click the [Power Off] button in the pop-up message.

Figure 4.9-1

3. Turn OFF the power supply switch at the left side of the analyzer.

4. Dispose of the used samples and reagents appropriately. If any contamination


of colored water recognized on the work table, wipe it with the water moistened
paper towel.

4-36
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

4.10 Check list at installation


Fill in the installation and operation status on the attached check list.

1. Operation environment

2. Installation site

3. Water supply and drainage

4. Data

Check the above items and fill in the evaluation.


If any condition does not meet the criteria, fill in its details on the check list. Make an
improvement on the point to meet the criteria. (e.g. installation environment
improvement)

4-37
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

<Check list at installation>


Check point Description Details Befo At Comment/remarks
re Install
Insta ation
llatio
n
Carry-in Available time for Approx. 1 hour
carry-in
Required persons Four persons
for carry-in
Installation hours Approx. 3 to 4 hours
Required persons 1 to 2 persons
for installation
Parking space Space for a 2t truck
Business Required
communication
Carry-in route Required width:
90cm or more
Elevator Check if any
available elevator for
use.
Protective tape Check if necessary.
Packing materials Check where to be Dimensions: packing
stored and disposed box 110cm (W) x
of the protective 110cm (D) x 90cm
materials at carry-in. (H) including resin
palette: 110cm (W) x
110cm (D) x 12.7cm
(H).
Installation Installation site Required space from
space not analyzer: 30cm or
including more each at right
deionized and left sides and
water 15cm or more at the
system rear. Dimensions
(analyzer): 87cm
(W) x 67cm (D) x
63cm (H) including
adjuster
Workbench: durable
enough for Biolyzer
300 Required:
approx. 120kg
Flat space
Within 2m from the Not acceptable for
power source use Power strip
Leveling Apply a level and Level adjustment by
check the levelness height adjustment

4-38
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Check point Description Details Befo At Comment/remarks


re Install
Insta ation
llatio
n
at the Sample tray bolt (acceptable
base of the analyzer. range: 28 to 43mm)
Monitor 37.5cm(W) x
13.7cm(D) x
38cm(H)
PC 18.7cm (W) x 34cm Available to use a
(D) x 32cm (H), cross LAN cable for
Operational PC extension.
needs to be placed
within 30 to 100 cm
from the analyzer.
Purified water 36cm(W) x 19cm(D)
tank (20L) x 42cm(H)
Low conc. 36cm(W) x 19cm(D)
wastewater tank x 42cm(H)
(20L)
High conc. 30cm(W) x 15cm(D)
wastewater tank x 33cm(H)
(10L)
Wash solution 13cm(W) x 24cm(D)
tank (5L: x 28cm(H), total 2
standard) pieces
External Liquid 37cm (W) x 22cm
Level Sensors (H) x 14cm (H), or
(option) 27cm (H) when
installing wash
solution tanks (2L)
Uninterruptible 14.5cm(W) x
power(-supply) 48cm(D) x
system (UPS) 22.4cm(H)
Printer and paper 45cm (W) x 35cm
(D) x 20cm (H),
space required for
paper feed tray.
Operation Environment Dustless place with
environment good ventilation.
Avoid areas where
the analyzer may be
adversely affected
by air containing
such as salt and
sulfur.
Avoid area where is

4-39
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Check point Description Details Befo At Comment/remarks


re Install
Insta ation
llatio
n
adjacent to the
storage room of
chemical or the
place any gas is
likely to be
generated.
Avoid the place that
is not subject to
direct sunlight and
wind from air
conditioning.
Avoid the place that
is not subject to
vibration or sound.
(no sensible
vibration)
In an indoor place
that is not subject to
direct wind or rain.
Water In a place that is not
exposed to splashes
or any other water.
Electromagnetic No devices that emit
wave a significant
electromagnetic
wave or noise are
close to the
analyzer.
Temperature Indoor temperature:
15 to 30ºC,
Temperature
variation: less than
2ºC per hour
No freezing.
Humidity Indoor humidity: 45
to 85% (No
condensation shall
be formed.)
Atmospheric Indoor condition:
pressure 800 to 1060hPa in
atmospheric
pressure, 2,000m or
less above sea level.

4-40
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Check point Description Details Befo At Comment/remarks


re Install
Insta ation
llatio
n
Water supply Volume Capacity: approx.
5L/h or more
Water 5 to 35ºC
temperature
Drain Drain outlet At the right side of
analyzer
Drain drop from Drain drop from
analyzer analyzer to
wastewater tank:
30cm or more.
Distance (analyzer
to tank): 100cm or
less. The drain tubes
are positioned not
parallel to the floor,
with adequate
gradient and
smoothly sending to
corresponding
tanks.
Tube length Length: 1m for each
3 tubes, size: 15mm
(inside diameter)
and 20mm (outer
diameter)
Power Voltage 100V±10%,
supply not (actual value: V)
including Total voltage 1320VA (Max.)
deionized Power outlet At least 6 outlets
water (100V, 3-pronged,
system with a ground
terminal)
Analyzer 650VA exclusively
for analyzer through
cable entry point (no
power strip
available)
PC 400VA exclusively
for PC
Monitor 40VA
Uninterruptible 80VA
power(-supply)
system (UPS)

4-41
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Check point Description Details Befo At Comment/remarks


re Install
Insta ation
llatio
n
Printer 150VA
System IRU Stable within
required 37±0.3ºC after
temperature power ON.
RCU 15ºC or less after
power ON.
Others Reagent bottle 70mL bottle and For use of the bottle
size 20ml round bottle for type, inquire clients
R1 and R2. and reagent
manufactures
Sample Tray Sample tube: 12 to For use of sample
16mm in inside tube type, inquire
diameter, 75 to client.
100mm in height.

Dye test results SPTS RPTS RPT2S


1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
Criteria CV<2.0% CV<2.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.0%
(applying
Degassing unit)
Coefficient of
variance (CV)

ISE test results Na K Cl


1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
Criteria CV<1.0% CV<1.0% CV<1.5% CV<1.5% CV<1.2% CV<1.2%
Coefficient of
variance (CV)

4-42
Chapter 4: Unpacking and installation

Software program version


UI Main Unit Main
Unit SPT Unit LIQ
Unit DTR
Unit SPT

4-43
Chapter 5: Cleaning

Chapter 5 Cleaning
This chapter describes cleaning instructions for each unit.

5.1 Sample/reagent pipette


A. Check the following points.

 The sample or reagent is dispensed in good condition during measurement.

 The surface of the pipette is not contaminated.

 There is no liquid leakage at the upper part of the pipette.

 No bending in the pipette.

B. Cleaning

 Before the cleaning procedure, make sure to turn off the analyzer.

 Disposable gloves must be worn by the operator to avoid any adherence of


liquids directly to the skin.

 In manual operating, hold the neck of shaft for the unit and raise or rotate the
arm.

 Prevent the cuvettes on the Incubation reaction unit from contamination of any
dust or liquids.

 In the case of using alcohol, should not be close to fire or high temperat ure
parts/units, because the alcohol is flammable liquid.

1. Hold and raise the sample or the reagent pipette by hand.

2. Wipe the pipette from top to bottom with the alcohol moistened gauze.

 When wiping the pipette, do not apply extra force to it. It is very important that
the pipette is vertically set so that the analyzer can function correctly. Improper
alignment may cause the damages of the pipette and/or inaccurate analysis
results.

5-1
Chapter 5: Cleaning

Figure 5.1-1

3. Insert the cleaning pointer of the pipette cleaning jig into the poi nt of the pipette
to clean the inside of the pipette.

 Two needles of the pipette cleaning jig on both sides: the thin (for the sample
pipette) and the thick type (for the reagent pipette). Distinguish the needle
type from the intended usage part.

Figure 5.1-2

4. Wipe the pipette cover entirely with the neutral detergent moistened gauze.

Figure 5.1-3

5-2
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5. After cleaning inside the Sample pipette, perform the pipette wash with purified
water by pressing the [Sample Pipette Wash] button in the [Run (F5)] > [Daily
Maintenance] screen.

 Prior to the sample pipette wash, place wash solution C-1 (diluted to 100 times
with purified water) in the Sample container and register the order. For the
procedure, refer to operator’s manual “6.3.7 Sample pipette wash.”

5-3
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.2 Washing unit


A. Check the following points.

 No contamination on the surface of the supply/drain nozzles.

 No liquid leakage at the upper part of the supply/drain nozzles.

 No bending in the supply/drain nozzles.

B. Cleaning

 Before the cleaning procedure, make sure to turn off the analyzer.

 Disposable gloves must be worn by the operator to avoid any adherence of


liquids directly to the skin.

 Prevent the cuvettes on the Incubation reaction unit from contamination of any
dust or liquids.

 In the case of using alcohol, should not be close to fir e or high temperature
parts/units, because the alcohol is flammable liquid.

1. Raise the knob of the washing unit by hand slowly.

2. Wipe the supply/drain nozzles with the alcohol moistened gauze gently. Avoid
bending the nozzles while cleaning.

 When wiping the nozzle, do not apply extra force to it. It is very important that
the nozzle is vertically set so that the analyzer can function correctly. Improper
alignment may cause the damages of the nozzle and/or inaccurate analysis
results.

3. Wipe the Washing unit base with the neutral detergent moistened gauze.

Figure 5.2-1

5-4
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.3 Stirrer
A. Check the following points.

 No contamination in the stirrer.

 No bending or broken in the stirrer.

B. Cleaning

 Before the cleaning procedure, make sure to turn off the analyzer.

 Disposable gloves must be worn by the operator to avoid any adherence of


liquids directly to the skin.

 Prevent the cuvettes on the Incubation reaction unit from contamination of any
dust or liquids.

1. Hold and raise the arm of the Stirrer unit slowly.

2. Wipe the stirrer with the neutral detergent moistened gauze gently. Avoid
bending the stirrer while cleaning.

3. Wipe the Stirrer unit cover with the neutral detergent moistened gauze.

Figure 5.3-1

5-5
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.4 Sample container


A. Check the following points.

 No contamination in the inner surface of the Sample container.

B. Cleaning

 Before the cleaning procedure, make sure to turn off the analyzer.

 Disposable gloves must be worn by the operator to avoid any adherence of


liquids directly to the skin.

1. Check that the reagent pipette is not positioned on the Sample container. If the
pipette is on the Sample container, move it away slowly from the Sample
container.

2. Remove the sample trays (both Inner and Outer) and the lid.

3. Wipe the sample trays (both Inner and Outer) and the lid with the neutral
detergent moistened gauze.

4. Wipe the inner surface of the Sample container with the neutral detergent
moistened gauze.

5. Attach the sample trays (both Inner and outer) and the lid in the reverse
procedure of the step 2.

5-6
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.5 Reagent container


A. Check the following points.

 No contamination in the inner surface of the Reagent container.

B. Cleaning

 Before the cleaning procedure, make sure to turn off the analyzer.

 Disposable gloves must be worn by the operator to avoid any adherence of


liquids directly to the skin.

1. Confirm that the reagent pipette is not positioned on the Reagent container. If
the pipette is on the Reagent container, move it away slowly from the Reagent
Container.

2. Remove the reagent tray and the lid.

3. Wipe the reagent tray and the lid with the neutral detergent moistened gauze.

4. Wipe the inner surface of the Reagent container with the neutral detergent
moistened gauze.

Figure 5.5-1

5. Attach the reagent tray and the lid in the reverse procedure of the step 2.

5-7
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.6 Work table


A. Check the following points.

 No contamination on the work table.

B. Cleaning

 Before the cleaning procedure, make sure to turn off the analyzer.

 Disposable gloves must be worn by the operator to avoid any adherence of


liquids directly to the skin.

1. Wipe the surface of the work table and the outer surface with the neutral
detergent moistened gauze.

Figure 5.6-1

5-8
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.7 External Tanks


A. Check the following points.

 No contamination inside the following external tanks.


Purified (system) Water Tank: 20L x 1
Low conc. Wastewater Tank: 20L x 1
High conc. Wastewater Tank: 10L x 1
Wash Solution Tank: 5L x 2

B. Cleaning

1. Discharge purified water, wastewater, or wash solution from each of the external
tanks.

2. Pour the Wash solution C-1 diluent (diluted to 100 times with purified water) into
the external tank.
The diluent volume for each tank varies depending on the tank size.

 Purified water tank: Diluent 2L (20mL of Wash solution C-1)

 Low conc. wastewater tank: Diluent 2L (20mL of Wash solution C -1)

 High conc. wastewater tank: Diluent 1L (10mL of Wash solution C-1)

 Wash solution tank: Diluent 500mL (5mL of Wash solution C-1)

3. Presoak for 10 min.

4. Discharge the diluent from the external tank.

5. Wash inside the external tank with purified water thoroughly.

 Wash thoroughly inside the external tank with purified water to completely
remove wash solution component.

5-9
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.8 Tube wash


Perform tube wash periodically to prevent tubes and subtank from bacteria.
Click the [Tube wash] button in the [Run(F5)] > [Daily Maintenance] screen and
perform the cleaning step 1 to 6. Perform the tube wash procedure indicated in the
screen.

 Perform the tube wash procedure every 4 weeks.

 When applying the Degassing unit (option), perform tube wash every 2 weeks.

A. Preparation

 Wash solution C-1 diluent (diluted to 100 times with purified water) (5 L)

 Purified water (20 L)

 Gauze or paper towel

B. Storage for wash solution C-1

 For the validity date, refer to the label on the bottle.

 The validity date is 6 months after opening.

C. Precautions for wash solution C-1

 Prepare wash solution C-1 diluent followed by the instructions on the label.

 For preparing diluent, use purified water (ion-exchanged water). If using tap
water, brown deposits (corroded iron) or white deposits (calcium chloride) may
be generated after several days passed.

 If the product expires, sodium hypochlorite contained in the pr oduct is


decomposed and effective chlorine is reduced. Therefore, dispose of an
expired product in an appropriate manner.

 Do not mix the product with acid material.

 Do not make the product contact with zinc plating or metals including iron,
ferric oxide, copper, copper alloy, etc. to prevent corrosion of them.

 When re-sampling the product into another container, use the container that
completely clean by rinsing it with pure water and dry it.

5-10
Chapter 5: Cleaning

D. Cleaning

1. Click the [Tube wash] button in the [Run(F5)] > [Dail y Maintenance] screen.

Figure 5.8-1

2. The [Tube Wash Procedures] screen appears.

Figure 5.8-2

3. Click the “Print” icon to print out the procedure on the screen.

 Click the “Cancel” icon to cancel the cleaning procedure.

4. Perform cleaning procedure. For details, refer to the following “E. Cleaning
procedure”.

5. When completing the cleaning procedure, the previous screen “Daily


Maintenance” appears automatically.

5-11
Chapter 5: Cleaning

E. Cleaning procedure

Follow the cleaning step 1 to 6 on the screen.


The only icon corresponding to the step becomes active.
The checkbox at the completed step automatically becomes ticked. When
repeating the same step, it needs to remove the checkmark.

1. Rinsing the wash solution tubes with purified water

Figure 5.8-3

(1) Connect the tubes from the wash solution 1 and 2 supply to the system
water tank. Click the “Execute” icon.

2. Preparatory operation

Figure 5.8-4

5-12
Chapter 5: Cleaning

(1) Discharge the purified water from the system water tank. Fill the tank
with 5 L of the wash solution C-1 diluent.
(2) Connect the supply tubes for the system water and the wash s olution 1
and 2 to the system water tank filled with the wash solution C-1 diluent.
(3) Click the “Shutdown” icon and power OFF the analyzer.
(4) Dismount the Side panel R. Discharge the remaining liquid in the
subtank.
Dismounting procedure for subtank
Loosen the 3 screw lids at the upper part of the subtank and disconnect the
subtank float sensor assembly and its tubes from the subtank.

Figure 5.8-5

(5) Install the empty subtank and mount the Side panel R to original position.
Mounting procedure for subtank
Connect the subtank float sensor assembly and its tubes to the subtank and
tighten the 3 screw lids.

Figure 5.8-6

5-13
Chapter 5: Cleaning

(6) Power ON the operational PC and the analyzer.

 After log-in, the previous screen appears automatically.

3. Cleaning supply tubes

Figure 5.8-7

(1) Confirm that the supply tubes for the system water and the wash solution
1 and 2 are connected to the system water tank filled with the wash
solution C-1 diluent. Click the “Execute” icon.

4. Rinsing the supply tubes with purified water

Figure 5.8-8

(1) Disconnect the supply tubes for the system water and the wash solution
1 and 2 from the system water tank filled with the wash solution C-1
diluent.
5-14
Chapter 5: Cleaning

(2) Discharge the wash solution C-1 diluent from the system water tank and
rinse inside the tank with purified water. Then fill the tank with purified
water up to the full level.
(3) Connect the supply tubes for the system water and the wash solution 1
and 2 to the system water tank filled with purified water. Click the
“Execute” icon.

5. Subtank remaining liquid disposal

Figure 5.8-9

(1) Click the “Shutdown” icon and power OFF the analyzer.
(2) Dismount the Side panel R and discharge the remaining liquid at the
subtank.
(3) Install the empty subtank and mount the Side panel R to original
position.
(4) Power ON the operational PC and the analyzer.

 After log-in, the previous screen appears automatically.

5-15
Chapter 5: Cleaning

6. Ending procedure

Figure 5.8-10

(1) Check that the system water supply tube is properly connected to the
system water tank.
(2) Connect the supply tubes for the wash solution 1 and 2 are connected to
the relevant wash solution tanks. Click the “Execute” icon.

5-16
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.9 Cuvettes
Perform water blank measurement to check any dirt on the cuvettes.

A. Check the cuvette status.

1. Select the [Run (F5)] > [Daily Maintenance] screen. Click the [Check water
blank] button to perform water blank measurement.

Figure 5.9-1

2. Check each of the cuvette status in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Water Blank]
screen.
The absorbance results of all wavelengths for all cuvettes are displayed.
The values exceeding the threshold value among the selected wavelengths
indicates in red. The values exceeding the threshold value among other
wavelengths indicates in yellow.

Figure 5.9-2

5-17
Chapter 5: Cleaning

3. Confirm that the values of all cuvette are within the threshold value.

B. Cuvette cleaning

1. Select the [Run (F5)] > [Daily Maintenance] screen. Click the [Wash cuvette]
button to perform the cuvette cleaning.

Figure 5.9-3

2. Click the [Check water blank] button again. Confirm that the values of all cuvette
are within the threshold value.

 After cuvette cleaning, if the value still indicates out of the threshold values,
needs to replace it with the new one.

 If more than 24 cuvettes with out of the threshold values, measurement cannot
start.

5-18
Chapter 5: Cleaning

5.10 ISE cleaning (option)


ISE cleaning needs to be performed weekly.

 Place the ISE cleaning (ISE Cleaner) in the Sample container and register the
order prior to ISE cleaning. For the registration procedure, refer to “6.3.9. ISE
cleaning (option).”

 ISE activation is automatically performed during ISE cleaning. Place the ISE
activator in the Sample container and register the order. For the registration
procedure, refer to “6.3.11 ISE activation (option).”

A. Cleaning

1. Check that the ISE cleaning and the ISE activator are placed on the designated
positions that registered in the [Test selection] screen, and then click the [ISE
Cleaning] button in the [Run (F5)] > [Daily Maintenance] screen.

2. Perform ISE cleaning and ISE activation.

5-19
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

Chapter 6 Periodical checks

6.1 Periodical checks


Here is described the check items that our serviceman performs every six months.
For the periodical check items and replacement procedures for users, refer to the
operator’s manual.

X=Check, C=Cleaning, R=Replacement

Unit Check item Check Interval Check point


(Months)
6 12
PSU Fan unit - - Replace every 3 years.
(FAN-AC4)
Power-supply X Measure the voltage by pressing the
voltage contact on the connector of the halogen
lamp. (11.95V to 12.05V)
Connector X Check whether the connector
connections connections are in good condition.
CNU Power-supply X Measure the voltage (TP5-TP4) of the
voltage CNT-CN PCB (5.0V to 5.2V).
Connector X Check whether the connector
connections connections are in good condition.
IRU Slip ring X R Check there is no damages in the slip
ring and the harness visually. Replace
the slip ring every 12 months.
Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
Check there is no damages in the timing
belts visually.
Temperature X Check that no alarms shall occur during
control measurement.
DTR Double-convex C Clean the lens with compressed air.
lens (32012-E)
Heat absorbing C Clean the filter with compressed air.
filter
Halogen lamp X Check the working hour of halogen lamp
working hour in the [Working Hour Counters] screen.
(Replacement: When the working hour runs over the
included in the endurance time, perform replacement.
user’s parts Halogen lamp: every 1000 hours
replacement list.)

6-1
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

Unit Check item Check Interval Check point


(Months)
6 12
WU Wipe tip R Replace every 6 months.
Compression X Lift up the wipe nozzle by hand and
springs check whether the nozzle smoothly
returns down to the original position.
Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
Check there is no damages in the timing
belts visually.

Detection sensors X Check that no errors occur in operation.


of remaining liquid Check that the values before and after
each nozzle is dipped in 150 uL purified
water. WU1-4: pulse count variation (500
or more).
MIX Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
SPT, Sample and X and Check there is no bending or damages
RPT reagent pipettes (R) in the pipette. Replace it as needed.
Liquid leakage at X Check there is no liquid leakage at the
the joint area joint area visually.
Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
Check there is no damages in the timing
belts visually.
Detection sensors X Check that no errors occur in operation.
of remaining liquid Check that the values before and after
each pipette is dipped in purified water.
SPT: pulse count variation (35 or more)
using 150uL purified water.
RPT: pulse count variation (100 or more)
using 5200uL purified water.
Down limit sensors X Hold the pipette by hand. Check the
ON/OFF state switches in the [Sensor]
screen by moving the pipette up and
down.
Sensor name: DOWN LIMIT

6-2
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

Unit Check item Check Interval Check point


(Months)
6 12
ASP Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
Check there is no damages in the timing
belts visually.
BCR C Wipe the contamination on the BCR
light-receiving light-receiving window with the neutral
window detergent moistened gauze or paper
towel.
Function of BCR X Check that no alarms shall occur during
measurement.
ASP lid sensor X Check the ON/OFF state switches in the
[Sensor] screen by mounting and
dismounting the ASP lid.
Emergency X Check the ON/OFF state switches in the
Sample lid sensor [Sensor] screen by mounting and
dismounting the emergency sample lid.
Sensor name: FRONT COVER
RCU Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
Check there is no damages in the timing
belts visually.
BCR C Wipe the contamination on the BCR
light-receiving light-receiving window with the neutral
window detergent moistened gauze or paper
towel.
Function of BCR X Check that no alarms shall occur during
measurement.
RCU lid sensor X Check the ON/OFF state switches in the
[Sensor] screen by mounting and
dismounting the RCU lid. Sensor name:
COVER
Cooling function X Pull out the reagent tray and check the
inner side of the reagent tray kept
uniformly refrigerated.
Temperature X Check that temperature is kept at 8 -
sensor 15ºC in the Reagent container in the
[Performance] screen.
Function of fan X Check that air is exhausted from the
bottom of the analyzer.

6-3
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

Unit Check item Check Interval Check point


(Months)
6 12
SWU Tubing X Check that there are no damages or
contaminations in the tubing visually.
Diaphragm pumps X Perform pump test in the [Sequence]
screen. Check that the diaphragm pump
works properly.
Diaphragm pumps R Replace after 500-hour use (approx. 6
months).
Check valves X Check that water shall not fall in 10
seconds after water supply into each
trough.
Inline filters N for R Replace Inline filters N for WU nozzle1
diaphragm pumps to 4 every 6 months.
Inline filters N for R Replace Inline filters N for the supply
external tanks tubes (purified water, wash solution 1
and 2) every 6 months.
SPP, Syringe tip X and Check the working hour of syringe tip for
RPP & working hour (R) each in the [Working Hour Counters]
WPP (Replacement: screen. When the working hour runs
included in the over the endurance time, perform the
user’s parts syringe tip replacement.
replacement list.) SPP, WPP : every 300 hours
RPP: every 150 hours
Function of X Perform priming in the [Sequence]
solenoid valves screen and check that purified water is
dispensed from the SPT, RPT, and WU
nozzles.
Also check that no alarms shall occur
during measurement.
Contamination of X and C Check that there is no contamination at
syringes the inside of the syringe. If any
contamination recognized, perform tube
wash.
Driving part of the X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
unit noises occur in operation.
Check there is no damages in the timing
belts visually.
Steel belts X Check that there are no damages in the
steel belts of the SPPS.

6-4
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

X=Check, C=Cleaning, R=Replacement


Unit Check item Check Interval Check point
(Months)
6 12
Tubes Tubes X and C Check that there are no damages or
contaminations in the tubing visually.
Perform tube replacement every 2
years.
Tube connections X Check that there is no leakage from the
tube connections. (Refer to the fluidic
diagram.)
Tube wash X Check that users perform tube wash
(Replacement: every 4 weeks. Perform tube wash as
included in the needed.
user’s parts
replacement list.)
Others Subtank X Check that there is no contamination
inside of the subtank.
Subtank full X Check that the subtank is filled at the full
sensor level in the [Sensor] screen.
Sensor name: FULL
Air filter X , C, Check that there are no contaminations
and R on the air filter visually. If any
contaminations, clean the filter with
compressed air. If the contaminations
still remaining, replace it with new one.
CHS fan X Check that no errors, vibrations, or
noises occur in operation.
Check that air is exhausted from the
center of the rear.
Top cover X Check that there are no noises when
(open/close opening or closing the top cover. Check
operation) that the top cover does not fall rapidly
after opening.
Inventory status of X Check the parts availability of the
the spare parts consumable parts, etc.
Performance of X Perform QC measurement and check
the analyzer the results reproducible.
DGU Degassing unit X Check that the pressure sensor of the
(option) Degassing unit does not indicate
abnormality in operation.
Degasser module C Disconnect the tube from the subtank
and connect it to the beaker with 50mL
or more of wash solution C-1. Perform
Sample pipette wash 20 times. Connect
the tube to the beaker with 100mL or
more of purified water and perform
Sample pipette wash 20 times.

6-5
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

Unit Check item Check Interval Check point


(Months)
6 12
DGU Degasser module R Replace every 12 months.
(option)
Diaphragm pump R Replace every 6 months.
of the Degasser
module
CDS Clot detection X Check that no alarms shall occur during
(option) sensor measurement.
ETS External tank X Check that the sensor is ON when each
(option) sensors (option) tank is filled at full level and OFF when it
is empty in the [Sensor] screen.
Sensor name: WATER (system water
tank)
Sensor name: WASH-1 (Wash solution 1
supply tank)
Sensor name: WASH -2 (Wash solution
2 supply tank)
Sensor name: LOW CONC. WASTE
(Low conc. wastewater tank)
Sensor name: HIGH CONC.WASTE
(High conc. wastewater tank)

6-6
Chapter 6: Periodical checks

X=Check, C=Cleaning, R=Replacement


Unit Check item Check Interval Check point
(Months)
6 12
ISE ISE sample port X Wipe the sample port area of the ISE
(Option) module with the purified water
moistened gauze or paper towel.
ISE solutions (L X and R Check the remaining volume and the
solution, Ref expiration date of L solution and Ref
solution, and H solution in the [Working Hour Counters]
solution) screen. When the remaining volume is
not enough, replace it with the new one.
Check the expiration date of H solution
for ISE calibration.
Other ISE X and R Check the expiration date of ISE
solutions (ISE cleaning and ISE etching.
cleaning, ISE Check that there is no problem on the
etching, and ISE serum quality used for ISE activation.
activation) ISE electrodes (Replacement:
included in the user’s parts replacement
list.) X and R Check the
working hour of each electrode in the
[Working Hour Counters] screen. When
the working hour runs over the
endurance time, perform the appropriate
electrode replacement
(Ref electrode: 360 days, Na electrode:
360 days, K electrode: 180 days, and Cl
electrode: 90 days)
ISE pump tube X and R Check the working hour of Pump tube in
(Replacement: the [Working Hour Counters] screen.
included in the When the working hour runs over the
user’s parts endurance time, perform the ISE pump
replacement list.) tube replacement
(Pump tube for ISE: 180 days)

6-7
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Chapter 7 Maintenance screens

7.1 Login for EL level


Some functions and screens for maintenance procedure are restricted for daily users.
Log in by engineer level enables to access the restricted functions or screens and
perform maintenance procedure.

To login as the engineer level, it is required to enter the provided password from the
manufacturer in the [Setup Password] screen.

7.2 Sequence

Maintenance (F10) > Sequence

Figure 7.2-1

This screen is available for maintenance procedure.


The [Sequence] screen includes the similar functions as the [Run (F5)] > [Daily
Maintenance] screen.

7-1
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

A. Maintenance operation area

Figure 7.2-2

1. Initialization:
Place back each unit to its default position.

2. Check water blank:


Perform water blank measurement to check the cuvette quality. Perform
measurement using all wavelengths for all of the cuvettes. The results can be
checked in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Water Blank] screen.

3. Wash cuvette:
Perform the cuvette cleaning.

4. Pour water into cuvettes:


Fill the purified water or the wash solution into the cuve tte.

5. Waste water from cuvettes:


Discharge the purified water or the wash solution from the cuvette.

6. Ascend/Descend Stirrer:
Move the Stirrer unit up or down.

7. Ascend/Descend Washer:
Move the Washing unit up or down.

8. ISE Prime:
Fill the tubes with the L solution to remove the air bubbles in the tubing. Perform
priming at the specified number of times.

7-2
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

9. ISE Calibration:
Perform 2-point calibration after registering the position of the L solution in the
[Run (F5)] > [Test Selection] screen.

10. ISE Cleaning:


Perform cleaning of the ISE unit and its tubing after register ing the position of
the ISE Cleaner in the [Run (F5)] > [Test Selection] screen.

11. ISE Etching:


Perform Na electrode cleaning after registering the position of the ISE etching
solution in the [Run (F5)] > [Test Selection] screen.

12. ISE Electrode Exchange:


This is available to use when replacing the ISE electrodes and the pump tubes.
After discharging the liquid from the ISE electrode tubing, automatically shut
down the operational PC.

13. ISE Activation:


Perform the ISE activation after the ISE electrode replacement to increase the
adaptation.

14. ISE Drain:


Perform discharging waste in the ISE unit. Prior to this procedure, make sure to
disconnect the tubes from the L solution bag and the Ref solution b ag.

15. Skip Round Prep.


When this checkbox is ON, the analyzer will skip preparat ion process at the
round start.

7-3
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

B. Pipette wash area

Figure 7.2-3

Perform pipette wash for the sample pipette or the reagent pipette. Select purified
water (system water) or wash solution.

1. Sample:
Perform washing for the sample pipette. Specify the wash by ticking “System
water” or “Wash solution” (registered in the Sample Container).

2. Reagent:
Perform washing for the reagent pipette. Specify the wash by ticking “System
water” or “Wash solution” (registered in the Reagent Container).

3. Wash Solution Registration:


Specify the wash solution for the pipette presoak wash in the [System Setup 1]
screen.

7-4
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

C. Pump test area

Figure 7.2-4

Perform pump test for each pump with specifying the operation time. This funct ion is
for checking whether each pump works properly.
The following pumps can operate at the respective area:

 MIX1: a pump for supplying purified water to the Stirrer unit 1 trough

 MIX2: a pump for supplying purified water to the Stirrer unit 2 trough

 SPT-T: a pump for supplying purified water to the Sample pipette trough

 RPT-T: a pump for supplying purified water to the Reagent pipette trough

 WU1: a pump for discharging the waste at the Wash nozzle 1.


 WU2: a pump for discharging the waste at the Wash nozzl e 2.

 WU3: a pump for discharging the waste at the Wash nozzle 3.

 WU4: a pump for discharging the waste at the Wash nozzle 4.


 WU5: a pump for discharging the waste at the Wash nozzle 5.

 Sub-Tank: a pump for supplying purified water to the subtank.

Specify the operation time by entering designated seconds at the “Time”.

D. Move unit area

Figure 7.2-5

Specify the mode and the position for each motor and perform motor operation. This
function is for checking whether the motor works properly and the position adjustment
after the unit replacement.

1. Motor:
Select the motor from drop-down menu.

7-5
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

2. Mode:
Select the operation mode (4 kinds) from drop-down menu.

 Search: returns the motor to the original position.

 Move: rotates the motor to move the unit to the position specified at the
“Position”.

 Check: move the motor outside of the original position and returns it to the
original position.

 Pulse:enter the pulse count at the “Pulse Number”.


When selecting “Pulse” at the “Mode”, the “Position” area is switched to the
“Pulse Number” area.

3. Position:
When selecting the “Move” at the “Mode”, select the motor designated position
from drop-down menu.

<Motor position list>


No. Motor Operation Position Description
00 MIX1U Move the Stirrer unit MIX1TR0 At the trough
1 up and down.
MIX1TR1 At the position where starts driving
at low speed within the trough
MIX1CELL At the standby position where set
the cuvette in and out.
MIX1PULL At the position where starts driving
at low speed in the cuvette
MIX1IRU At the mixing position
MIX1UCHK For factory inspection purpose
01 MIX2U Move the Stirrer unit MIX2TR0 At the trough
2 up and down.
MIX2TR1 At the position where starts driving
at low speed within the trough
MIX2CELL At the standby position where set
the cuvette in and out.

MIX2PULL At the position where starts driving


at low speed in the cuvette
MIX2IRU At the mixing position
MIX2UCHK For factory inspection purpose
02 MIX1S Rotate the stirrer -
paddle of the Stirrer
unit 1
03 MIX2S Rotate the stirrer -

7-6
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

paddle of the Stirrer


unit 2
04 RPTR Move the reagent RPTRTRDX At the drain of the RPT trough.
pipette horizontally.
RPTRTRD At the purified water inlet of the
RPT trough.
RPTRRCUOUT At the reagent aspiration position
of the RCU outer tray.
RPTRRCUIN At the reagent aspiration position
of the RCU inner tray.
05 RPTU Move the reagent RPTUDMYU At the height when discharging at
pipette up and down. the RPT trough.
RPTUTRDU At the height when discharging at
the RPT trough.
RPTUIRUD At the bottom of the cuvette
RPTURCUD At the bottom of the reagent bottle
06 SPTR Move the sample SPTRTRDX At the drain of the SPT trough.
pipette horizontally.
SPTRTRD At the purified water inlet of the
SPT trough
SPTRTRDY At the drain of the SPT trough
SPTRASPOUT At the sample aspiration position
of the ASP outer tray.

SPTRASPMID At the sample aspiration position


of the ASP midst tray.

SPTRASPIN At the sample aspiration position


of the ASP inner tray
SPTRISE At the dispensing position of the
ISE sample
07 SPTU Move the sample SPTUTRDU At the height when discharging the
pipette up and down. dummy sample at the SPT trough.
SPTUISEU At the height where dispensing the
ISE sample.
SPTUIRUD At the bottom of the cuvette
SPTRASPD At the bottom of the sample tube.
SPTRASPDI At the bottom of the sample cup.
SPTUCUPD At the bottom of the sample cup
(pediatric).
SPTUISEU_H At the height where dispensing the
ISE sample (2).
08 WU Move the Washing WUUP2 At the 22mm height from the
unit up and down. bottom of the cuvette.
WUUSP1 At the 23mm height from the
bottom of the cuvette.
WUUSP2 At the 0.5mm height from the
bottom of the cuvette.
7-7
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

WUUDL At the bottom of the cuvette


09 IRU Rotate the Incubator. IRU1CV Rotate one cuvette length.
10 WPP Move the Wash WUPRESID At the position where absorbing air
syringe up and down. after dispensing purified water or
wash solution.
WUPWASH1 At the position where aspirating
550µL of wash solution.
WUPTEI1 At the position where aspirating
the fixed 650µL of wash solution.
WUPTEI2 At the position where aspirating
the fixed 700µL of purified water.
WUPURE At the position where aspirating
the 700µL of purified water.
11 SPP Move the sample -
syringe (SPPS) up
and down.
12 ASP Rotate the Sample ASP1SAMPLE Rotate one position length.
Container.
ASPOUT (No. 27) zero position
ASPMID (No. 64)
ASPIN (No. 1)
13 RCU Rotates the Reagent RCU1RG Rotate one reagent bottle length.
Container.
RCURGINRPT At the reagent aspiration position
of the RCU inner tray.
RCURGOUTR At the reagent aspiration position
PT of the RCU outer tray.
14 RPP Move the reagent -
syringe (RPPR) up
and down.
15 RPPW Move the reagent -
syringe (RPPW) up
and down.
16 SPPW Move the sample -
syringe (SPPW) up
and down.

7-8
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

E. Prime area

Figure 7.2-6

Fill the tubes with purified water or wash solution to remove the air bubbles in the tubes.
After priming, it is available to select the execution of the sleep mode or shut down.

1. Prime:
Perform priming at the specified number of times.

2. Prime and Sleep:


Perform priming at the specified number of times and ent er the sleep mode.

3. Prime and Shutdown:


Perform priming at the specified number of times and shut down the analyzer.

F. Barcode adjustment area

Figure 7.2-7

1. Reagent Barcode Adjustment:


Perform the position adjustment for the reagent barcode reader.

Click the [Reagent Barcode Adjustment] button. The following pop-up message
appears.

Figure 7.2-8

7-9
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Place the reagent bottle at the position specified by the pop -up message. Click
the [OK] button. Then start scanning the barcode label of the reagent bottle.
Perform total 20 scans.
When 20 scans successfully completed and all of the scan results are
recognized equal, the following pop-up message appears indicating the
scanned results.

Figure 7.2-9

When more than one out of 20 scans failed or any of the scan results are not
recognized equal, the following pop-up message appears.
To scan barcode label successfully, adjust the barcode reader position.
To rescan the barcode label, click the [Re-Scan] button in the pop-up message.

2. RCU barcode continuous scans


Perform barcode scan check for the reagent barcode reader.
Click the [Reagent Barcode Check Scan] button. The following pop-up message
appears.

Figure 7.2-10

Place the reagent bottles labeled barcodes at all of the specified positions. Click
the [OK] button and start barcode scan. Perform scanning for all positions twice.
The following message appears when scans are completed.

7-10
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Figure 7.2-11

When the barcode scans twice are successfully completed, it is recognized the
barcode scan functions properly.
To rescan the barcode label, click the [Re-Scan] button in the pop-up message.

3. Sample Barcode Adjustment


Perform position adjustment for the sample barcode reader.
Click the [Sample Barcode Adjustment] button. The following pop-up message
appears.

Figure 7.2-12

Place the sample tube at the position specified by the pop-up message. Click
the [OK] button. Then start scanning the barcode label on the sample tube.
When 20 scans successfully completed and all of the scan results are
recognized equal, the following pop-up message appears indicating the
scanned results.

7-11
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Figure 7.2-13

When more than one out of 20 scans failed or any of the scan results are not
recognized equal, all 20 scan results are displayed in the following pop -up
message.
To scan barcode label successfully, adjust the barcode reader position.
To rescan the barcode label, click the [Re-Scan] button in the pop-up message.

4. ASP barcode continuous scans


Perform barcode scan check for sample barcode reader.
Click the [Sample Barcode Check Scan] button. The following pop-up message
appears.

Figure 7.2-14

Place the sample tubes labeled barcodes at all of the specified positions # 1 to #
40. Click the [OK] button and start barcode scan. Barcode scan will be
performed for the position # 1 to 40 twice.
The following message appears when scans are completed.

7-12
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Figure 7.2-15

When the barcode scans twice are successfully completed, it is recognized the
barcode scan functions properly. To rescan the barcode label, click the
[Re-Scan] button in the pop-up message.

7-13
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

G. Operation registration area

Figure 7.2-16

This area is available to perform each of the unit operation s that preprogrammed.
One button can be registered for one operation. (Four buttons available)

Prepare the unit operation program in the following format.

CA-270MotorMoveCommandFile
(motor unit number), (mode number), (position), (remaining seconds)
(motor unit number), (mode number), (position), (remaining seconds)

(max. 50 lines)

9999

 To save the program, save in the ”C:Documents and Settings¥All


Users¥Application Data¥CA¥CAUI¥Data".

 Specify the file extension as ".cmd". (file name: up to 8 alphanumeric


characters)

 Pulse count is available for position assignment.

7-14
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

7.3 Water blank

Maintenance (F10) > Check water blank

Figure 7.3-1

This screen is available for checking the cuvette water blank results.

A. Wave lengths/ Date time area

Figure 7.3-2

7-15
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

1. Wave length:
Select the wavelength for viewing the results from drop-down menu.

2. Date time:
Select the date and time for viewing the results from drop-down menu. Latest 20
results are available to view.

B. Water blank result display area

Figure 7.3-3

The water blank results for each cuvette are displayed on this screen. When water
blank measurement is completed, this area is updated the values.

When the cuvette is beyond the threshold value in the specified wave length s the
cuvette # is displayed in red. When it is beyond the threshold value in other wave
lengths, it is displayed in yellow. The cuvette beyond the threshold value is not used for
measurement. At least 24 usable cuvettes are required for measurement start.

C. Cumulative data display area

Figure 7.3-4

1. Cuvette No.:
Enter the cuvette # to display its cumulative data.

7-16
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

2. Graph:
The water blank results for each cuvette are displayed in graph format. The
results up to latest 20 results are available to be displayed.

3. Max./Min.:
Specify the graph display area.

D. Judgment value (mAbs/10)

Figure 7.3-5

1. Judgement value (mAbs/10):


specify the threshold value in absorbance for water blank measurement.
Unit: mAbs/10
<default setting: 5000>

2. Save:
Saves the water blank results. This button is available only after the water blank
measurement.

3. Print:
Print out the displayed water blank results.

4. Output history:
Saves the water blank results as a file. The up to last 3-month water blank
results can be saved. When saving the results, the mean values are saved after
calculating the results in a day.

5. Cuvette replacement:
When water blank measurement needs to be performed again after cuvette
replacement, click this button prior to replacement. The following pop -up
message appears.

7-17
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Figure 7.3-6

Perform the cuvette replacement and click the [OK] button. The following
pop-up message appears for confirmation.

Figure 7.3-7

7-18
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

7.4 Performance

Maintenance (F10) > Performance

Figure 7.4-1

A. Temperature control area

Figure 7.4-2
7-19
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

1. Graph

2. Temperature

 Incubator: Displayed the values from the three temperature sensors in the
Incubator.
 Reagent Container: Displayed the values from the three temperature sensors
in the Incubator.

3. Offset

 Incubator: Enter the offset value for each temperature sensor in the Incubato r.
Enter the value in units of 0.01 ºC.

 Reagent Container: Enter the offset value for each temperature sensor in the
Reagent container. Enter the value in units of 0.01 ºC.

B. Detector Performance Monitor

Figure 7.4-3

1. Wave Length
Displays the wavelengths in the Detector unit.

2. Gain
Displays the gain value for each wave length.

3. Voltage
Displays the voltage of the halogen lamp by the indicated gain value.

4. Automatic Gain
7-20
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

Automatically perform the gain adjustment for the halogen lamp. After halogen
lamp replacement, gain adjustment needs to be performed.

5. Check Lamp
Perform halogen lamp power check. The results will be displayed at the
“Voltage”. If it is under the specified value, it is displayed in r ed.

6. Detector Check Start


Perform photometry for each wave length manually. (It is performed
automatically at the regular measurement.)

7-21
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

7.5 Sensor

Maintenance (F10) > Sensor

Figure 7.5-1

This screen is available to check ON/OFF state for each sensor in the analyzer. It is
effective when performing mechanical check in the analyzer.

A. Sensor/pulse

1. Sensor, SPT, RPT, WU1, WU2, WU3, WU4, and Clot

 Sensor: Displays sensor state in the analyzer.

 SPT to WU4: Perform liquid level sensor check for the SPT, the RPT and the
WU1 to 4.

 Clot: Perform clog detection sensor check for the SPT.

2. Read Start:
Starts to obtain the current sensor state.

 The following operation is not available during obtaining the information.


(1) Switch to other screen.
(2) Use the function keys (keyboard).
(3) Shut down procedure

7-22
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

B. Sensor state

Displays the ON/OFF state for each sensor. When the sensor is ON, it is displayed in
red. When it is OFF, it is displayed in yellow.
Following are the sensors displayed on the screen.

<Sensor list>
Unit Sensor Description
CHS RIGHT MIDDLE LEAK Leak sensor at the middle layer of the right side.
RIGHT LOWER LEAK Leak sensor at the lower layer of the right side.
LEFT MIDDLE LEAK Leak sensor at the middle layer of the left side.
CHASSIS FAN Chassis fan
PSU FAN POWER Power supply cooling fan
IRU ORIGIN Zero-Point Sensor
DTR FAN Cooling fan for halogen lamp
WU WU ORIGIN Up Zero-Position Sensor
ASP ORIGIN Zero-Point Sensor
FRONT COVER Emergency Sample Lid Sensor
ALL COVER ASP Lid Sensor
RCU ORIGIN Zero-Point Sensor
COVER RCU Lid Sensor
PELTIER1 FAN RCU Peltier1 fan
PELTIER2 FAN RCU Peltier2 fan
MIX 1 ORIGIN Zero-Position Sensor
MIX 2 ORIGIN Zero-Position Sensor
SPT UP ORIGIN Up Zero-Position Sensor
ROTATION ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Position Sensor
DOWN LIMIT Down Limit Sensor
RPT UP ORIGIN Up Zero-Position Sensor
ROTATION ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Position Sensor
DOWN LIMIT Down Limit Sensor
SPP SPPS ORIGIN SPPS Zero-Position Sensor
SPPW ORIGIN SPPW Zero-Position Sensor
RPP RPPR ORIGIN RPPR Zero-Position Sensor
RPPW ORIGIN RPPW Zero-Position Sensor
WPP ORIGIN WPP Zero-Position Sensor
SUB TANK FULL Subtank Full Sensor
POSITION Tank Detection Sensor
CHAMBER OVERFLOW Trough Chamber Liquid Level Sensor
DC POWER 24V1A MAIN 24V Power Supply
24V1B MAIN 24V Power Supply
24V2A ASP/RCU 24V Power Supply (ASP/RCU)
24V2B ASP/RCU 24V Power Supply (ASP/RCU)
TANK WATER Liquid level sensor for purified water tank
(OPTION)
WASH-1 Liquid level sensor for wash solution tank 1
WASH-2 Liquid level sensor for wash solution tank 2

7-23
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

LOW CONC. WASTE Liquid level sensor for low conc. wastewater
tank
HIGH CONC. WASTE Liquid level sensor for high conc. wastewater
tank
DEAERATOR PRESSURE Pressure detection sensor inside the Degassing
(OPTION) unit.

7-24
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

7.6 Volume Adjustment

Maintenance (F10) > Volume Adjustment

Figure 7.6-1

By dispensing the specified volume with each pipette and entering the actual volume
on this screen, perform volume adjustment between the indicated dispensing volume
and the actual volume.

 Since the entered volumes have been adjusted at the factory shipment, do not
change the volume basically except if necessary.

 After saving the values, reboot the analyzer and the operational PC.

A. Volume Adjustment

1. Sample Pipette:
Enter actual volumes for measurement when dispensing 1.5 µL and 20 µL with
the sample pipette.

2. Reagent Pipette:
Enter actual volumes for measurement when dispensing 20 µL and 100 µL with
the reagent pipette.

B. ISE Volume Adjustment

1. Sample:
Enter the actual volume for measurement when dispensing an ISE sample (53
µL).
7-25
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

2. Diluted Sample 1:
Enter the actual volume for measurement when dispensing an ISE diluted
sample (53 µL).

7-26
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

7.7 DTR Position

Maintenance (F10) > Detector Position

Figure 7.7-1

This screen is available to adjust the photometry position for each cuvette in the
Incubator.
The offset position for each cuvette are displayed.

1. Click the “Execute” icon to offset the photometry position again.

2. Click the “Save” icon to save the offset values displayed on the screen in file
format. Saved as “csv” format.
Click the […] button to specify the destination folder to be saved.

7-27
Chapter 7: Maintenance screens

7.8 Operation Logs

Maintenance (F10) > Operation Logs

Figure 7.8-1

This screen is available to search the previous operation logs.


It is useful to trace the cause if an error occurs.

1. User Name:
Select the user name from drop-down menu.

2. User Level:
Displays the user level that selected from the “User Name”.

3. Date:
Enter the period to search for the operation log. Specify the date by clicking the
calendar.

 [Enable]: When not ticking the checkbox, it is not available to specify the search
start and end dates.

4. Output Result:
Specify the results output from drop-down menu.

 Monitor: Displays the operation logs at lower part of the screen.

 File: Saves the result in file format. Saved as “csv” format.

5. “Search” icon:
Searches for the results and saves.

7-28
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

Chapter 8 Parts replacement


This chapter explains:
 Replacement procedure for each unit

 Replacement procedure for major parts within each unit

 Adjustment required after the parts replacement

As parts replacement procedures, only dismounting procedures are explained here.


Mounting procedures are omitted because they are basically the reverse of the
dismounting procedures. Exceptionally, mounting procedures or remarks are given in
cases where adjustment or special care is required.

For dismounting/mounting explained in this chapter, the following items are required:

Special tools and materials


Item Description
Belt tension meter Required for replacement of motors with timing belts. After
making motor/timing belt replacement, the tension of the belt
needs to be adjusted. To measure the belt tension, use a tension
meter “DOCTOR TENSION TYPE-I” recommended by the timing
belt manufacturer. Contact us for the tension meter, if necessary.
Liquid gasket For the wipe tip replacement (WU)
(1212)
Jig Syringe tip insertion jig
Flare processing jig
Tip replacement jig
Zero position adjusting jig
Silicon oil Required for syringe tip
(KF-96H-50000CS)
Silicon rubber As weatherstripping of lagging material for the RCU case and the
(KE347W) RCU peltier assembly.
Heat sink Required for a joint area between the RCU case and the RCU
(HSC-50) peltier assembly.

Note: Hold the neck of the shaft when vertically rotating SPT/RPT/MIX1/MIX2 unit by
hand.

8-1
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

Required Tools
Item Description
Screwdriver Required types:
+ Screwdrivers No.1 and No.2
+ Long Screwdriver No.2
+ Short Screwdriver No.2
- Screwdriver 6 mm
Torque Screwdriver No.2
Hex wrench Required sizes:
1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm
Small ratchet -
set
Ratchet Required sizes for packing:
wrench 13 mm
Box Required sizes:
screwdriver 5.5 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm
Spanner Required sizes:
5.5mm, 10mm, 13mm, 14mm, 14.2mm, 17mm, 19mm, 22mm
Long-nose -
pliers
Nipper -
Pliers -
Monkey -
wrench
Tube cutter Required for tubing
Retractable -
knife
Air blower Required for cleaning lens and filters.
Gap gauge Required for clearance adjustment in the pulley.
Tweezers -

Also refer to:


Chapter 13 Lists the parts available for maintenance.
Chapter 14 Electrical connections of PC boards, sensors, and motors, etc.
Chapter 15 Fluidic connections of tubes, pumps, and valves, etc.
Chapter 17 Connector locations

8-2
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.1 Chassis unit (CHS)

8.1.1 Replacement of covers (CVR)


Follow the dismounting procedure for the Mosaic covers. The figures below indicate
the dismounting and mounting procedure. The Mosaic-DTR and the Mosaic-ISE can be
dismounted individually regardless of the dismounting order.

A. Dismounting Mosaic covers

1. Dismount the side panel L and the side panel R.

2. The Mosaic covers are divided in the following figure. For replacement of parts
or units, dismount the Mosaic covers as required.

Figure 8.1-1

8-3
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Mounting Mosaic covers

Mounting procedure: 1 > 2 > 3 > 4

Figure 8.1-2

8.1.2 Replacement of panels


For replacement of parts or units, dismount the panel as required.

A. Dismounting Side panels and Front panel

1. Loosen the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the side panel L (or side panel R)
by sliding it backward.

Figure 8.1-3

8-4
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

2. Loosen the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the front panel by sliding it
forward.

Figure 8.1-4

B. Dismounting Rear panel

1. Remove the five screws (M3×8) and dismount the rear panel.

Figure 8.1-5

C. Dismounting Upper panel

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the upper panel.

Figure 8.1-6

8-5
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.1.3 Replacement of frame (FRM)


A. Dismounting Auto hinge

1. Dismount the upper panel.

2. Remove the four screws (M3×8) for the auto hinge and the four screws (M3×8)
for the free stop hinge and dismount the top cover from the upper panel.

Figure 8.1-7

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and the four screws (M3×6) and dismount he
auto hinge.

Figure 8.1-8

B. Dismounting Air filters

1. Remove the side panel L (or side panel R).

2. Remove the air filters that are detachable using the hook and the loop fasteners.

Figure 8.1-9

8-6
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting MAIN-DRV PCB

1. Remove the rear panel.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the MAIN-DRV PCB.

3. Remove the nine screws (M3×8) and dismount the MAIN-DRV PCB.

Figure 8.1-10

D. Dismounting IRU_CN1 PCB

1. Remove the rear panel.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the IRU_CN1 PCB.

3. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the IRU_CN1 PCB.

Figure 8.1-11

E. Dismounting F-LED PCB

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and the front panel.

2. Disconnect the connector from the rear side of F-LED PCB.

8-7
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the F-LED PCB.

Figure 8.1-12

F. Dismounting CHS fan assembly

1. Dismount the rear panel.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN205) from the MAIN_DRV PCB.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×30) and dismount the CHS fan assembly.

Figure 8.1-13

8-8
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

G. Dismount Leak sensor assembly (right side) and sponge part.

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Remove the screw (M3×8) and the connecting lines from the leak sensor.
Dismount the leak sensor assembly.

Figure 8.1-14

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and the connecting lines. Dismount the sponge
from the leak sensor assembly.

Figure 8.1-15

8-9
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

H. Dismounting Leak sensor assembly (left side) and sponge part.

1. Dismount the rear panel.

2. Remove the screw (M3×8) and the connecting lines from the leak sensor.
Dismount the leak sensor assembly.

Figure 8.1-16

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and the connecting lines. Dismount the sponge
from the leak sensor assembly.

Figure 8.1-17

8-10
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.1.4 Replacement of Power supply unit (PSU)


A. Dismounting PSU assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L.

2. Remove the four connectors.

3. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the PSU assembly.

Figure 8.1-18

B. Dismounting Multi-slot power supply

1. Remove the PSU assembly from the analyzer.

2. Loosen the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the PSU cover.

Figure 8.1-19

8-11
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Disconnect all connectors from the Multi-slot power supply.

Figure 8.1-20

4. Remove the four screws (M4×10) at the rear of the PSU assembly and dismount
the Multi-slot power supply.

Figure 8.1-21

C. Dismounting PSU fan

1. Dismount the Multi-slot power supply from the PSU assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3) on the side of the Multi-slot power supply and
disconnect the connector from the PSU fan. Dismount the PSU fan.

Figure 8.1-22

8-12
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting single supply board (ISE option)

1. Remove the PSU assembly from the analyzer.

2. Dismount the PSU cover.

3. Disconnect all connectors from the single supply board.

4. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the single supply board.

Figure 8.1-23

E. Dismounting POWER-CN PCB

1. Remove the PSU assembly from the analyzer.

2. Dismount the cover of the PSU assembly.

3. Disconnect all connectors from the POWER-CN PCB.

4. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the POWER-CN PCB.

Figure 8.1-24

8-13
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

F. Dismounting Fuses

1. Turn the fuse holder as shown picture below and pull the fuse out.

Figure 8.1-25

2. Replace the fuses with the new ones that enclosed in the accessory kit.

Figure 8.1-26

8-14
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.1.5 Replacement of Control unit (CNU)


A. Dismounting Compact flash memory (CF).

 Prior to the compact flash memory replacement, backup data such as t he


specified offset values for the measurement.

1. Dismount the side panel L.

2. Remove the upper two screws (M3×8) and loosen the lower two screws (M3×8).
Dismount the CNU cover.

Figure 8.1-27

3. Dismount the Compact flash memory.

Figure 8.1-28

8-15
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting CNT-CN PCB

1. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the CNT-CN PCB.

Figure 8.1-29

C. Dismounting CNT-IBM PCB

1. Dismount the CNT-CN PCB.

2. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and the four hex spacers and dismount the
CNT-IBM PCB.

Figure 8.1-30

8-16
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.2 Reaction table block unit (RTB)

 When mounting the Mosaic-IRU, handle carefully not to tuck cables. For the
cables, tie them with a clip.

8.2.1 Replacement of Reaction table block unit (RTB)


A. Dismounting RTB assembly.

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and all Mosaic
covers.

2. Dismount the ASP assembly, the SPT assembly, the MIX1 assembly, and the
ISE assembly (option).

3. Remove the five screws (M4×15) fixing the RTB assembly.

Figure 8.2-1

4. Disconnect the connectors and tubes from the other units and pull out the RTB
assembly as indicated in the arrow direction.

Figure 8.2-2

8-17
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.2.2 Replacement of Incubation reaction unit (IRU)


A. Dismounting a cuvette (when replacing one cuvette.)

There are two cuvette types (resin or glass) available as option. Replacement
procedure is same for both cuvette types. However, the shape and the replacement
cycle vary depending on each type.

1. Select the cuvette # to be replaced in the [Water Blank] screen.

Figure 8.2-3

2. Click the [Cuvette Replacement] button.

Figure 8.2-4

3. When the replacement is ready, the following pop-up message appears.

Figure 8.2-5

8-18
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Dismount the Mosaic-DTR.

Figure 8.2-6

5. Loosen the two screws and dismount the cuvette holder.

 When dismounting the cuvette holder, handle carefully in the screws not to
drop them.

Figure 8.2-7

8-19
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

6. Replace the cuvette with the new one.

 When replacing,
Resin type: hold the upper handles of the cuvette.
Glass type: hold the upper part of the ground glass sides.
 To avoid any scratches on the surface of the cuvette, remove the cuvette
holder first and then perform cuvette replacement.

 Wear disposable gloves, mask, and eye protector to avoid any adherence of
liquids directly to the skin.

 Prevent any dust contamination in the cuvette.

 When placing the cuvette, make sure to vertically insert it on the cuvette table.

Figure 8.2-8

7. Fill the cuvette with 500µL of the Wash solution C-1 (diluted to 100 times) by
micropipette, etc.

 The new cuvette needs to be rinsed with the diluted wash solution C -1 before
use.

 If the cuvette not rinsed before use, it may effect on the measurement results.

8. Mount the cuvette holder in the reverse procedure of the step 5.

9. Mount the Mosaic DTR in the reverse procedure of the step 4.

8-20
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

10. Click the [OK] button in the pop-up message of the the step 3.

Figure 8.2-9

11. The pop-up message appears for the cuvette placement confirmation.
Click the [OK] button when confirming that all the cuvettes are placed on the
specified positions.

Figure 8.2-10

12. Leave the analyzer in the ready mode for more than 1 hour.

 When rinsing the new cuvette with the diluted wash solution C -1. It needs
more than 1 hour presoak.

13. Perform adjustment after cuvette replacement.

8-21
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting cuvettes (when replacing more than one cuvette at a time)

1. Dismount the Mosaic-DTR.

Figure 8.2-11

2. Move the cuvette to be replaced to the front position by rotating the Incubation
Reaction unit to right and left manually.

 Before rotating the Incubation reaction unit, confirm that the wash nozzle or
the stirrer paddle is not inserted into the cuvette. If any of them is in its proper
position, raise each of the unit.

3. Loosen the two screws and dismount the cuvette holder.

 When dismounting the cuvette holder, handle carefully in the screws not to
drop them.

Figure 8.2-12

8-22
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Replace the cuvette with the new one.

 When replacing,
Resin type: hold the upper handles of the cuvette.
Glass type: hold the upper part of the ground glass sides.
 To avoid any scratches on the surface of the cuvette, remove the cuvette
holder first and then perform cuvette replacement.

 Wear disposable gloves, mask, and eye protector to avoid any adherence of
liquids directly to the skin.

 Prevent any dust contamination in the cuvette.

 When placing the cuvette, make sure to vertically insert it on the cuvette table.

Figure 8.2-13

5. Mount the cuvette holder in the reverse procedure of the step 3.

6. Mount the Mosaic DTR in the reverse procedure of the step 1.

7. Power ON the operational PC and the analyzer.

8. Select the [Daily Maintenance] screen.

8-23
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

9. Select “Wash bottle” from drop-down menu and click the [Pour water into
cuvettes] button.

 Place the reagent bottle filled with the wash solution C -1 (diluted to 100 times)
in the RCU.

 Register the bottle information as the wash solution in the [Reagent


Registration] screen.

 Register the diluted wash solution C-1 as “Wash Solution” at the Reagent code
for Cuvette Water Placement in the [System Setup 1] screen.

Figure 8.2-14

10. Leave the analyzer in the ready mode for more than 1 hour.

 When rinsing the new cuvette with the diluted wash solution C-1, it needs
more than 1 hour presoak.

11. Perform adjustment after cuvette replacement.

8-24
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Adjustment after cuvette replacement


The measuring point correction is required after cuvette replac ement.

1. Power ON the analyzer.

2. Select [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.

3. Select “System Water” from drop-down menu and click the [Pour water into
cuvettes] button.

Figure 8.2-15

4. Select [Maintenance (F10)] > [Detector Position] screen.

5. Click the “Execute” icon.

Figure 8.2-16

8-25
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting Slip ring

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the Mosaic front, and the
Mosaic-IRU.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN350) from the IRU_CN2 PCB.

Figure 8.2-17

3. Disconnect the relay connector.

Figure 8.2-18

4. Unlock the clamp and remove the harness.

Figure 8.2-19

8-26
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and the screw (M3×40) to dismount the spacer.
Dismount the slip ring.

Figure 8.2-20

D. Dismounting Cuvette table assembly.

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and all Mosaic
covers.

2. Dismount the Slip ring assembly.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the Slip ring base assembly.

Figure 8.2-21

4. Hold the handle of the WU and raise the WU.

5. Remove the four screws (M3×10) and pull out the Cuvette table assembly by
lifting up the handle.

Figure 8.2-22

8-27
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Zero position adjustment for Cuvette table assembly

1. Temporarily fix the Cuvette table assembly by tightening the four screws
(M3×10).

Figure 8.2-23

2. Power ON the analyzer.

3. Press the [Initialization] button.

4. Insert the IRU table adjuster into the hole for position adjustment.

Figure 8.2-24

8-28
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Fix the IRU table adjuster by tightening the screw (M3×12).

 Insert the IRU table adjuster into the hole for position adjustment to the bottom
and fix the screw.

Figure 8.2-25

6. Fix the Cuvette table assembly by tightening the four screws (M3×10).

Figure 8.2-26

7. Remove the screw (M3×12) and dismount the IRU table adjuster.

8-29
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting IRU/ASP motor assembly and its timing belt.

1. Dismount the RTB assembly.

2. Remove the two hex socket head bolts (M5×12) and dismount the IRU motor
plate.

Figure 8.2-27

3. Remove the four screws (M4×12) and dismount the IRU/ASP motor assembly.

Figure 8.2-28

4. Remove the two screws (M3×8) on the Encoder base 2 and dismount the timing
belt.

Figure 8.2-29

8-30
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6 N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type -I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 87mm

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

Figure 8.2-30

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.

 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the two hex socket head bolts (M5×12).

Figure 8.2-31

4. Adjust the tension by moving the IRU motor plate in the arrow direction.

5. Tighten the two hex socket head bolts (M5×12).

6. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

7. Check that the belt tension is within the acceptable range.

8-31
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

F. Dismounting Rotary encoder assembly

1. Dismount the RTB assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) on the Encoder base 2.

Figure 8.2-32

3. Loosen the two hex socket head screws (M3×3).

Figure 8.2-33

4. Pull down and dismount the Rotary encoder assembly with plate.

Figure 8.2-34

8-32
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the Rotary encoder assembly
from the plate.

Figure 8.2-35

 Prior to mounting the Rotary encoder assembly, check that the rotary encoder
is tightly placed against the IRU shaft. Then perform the mounting procedure.

G. Dismounting Temperature fuses (IRU-TF1, IRU-TF2, IRU-TF3).

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and the Mosaic-IRU.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the sensor springs fixing on the
temperature fuses.

Figure 8.2-36

3. Disconnect the connectors from the IRU_CN2 PCB.


IRU_TF1: Connector (CN351)
IRU_TF2: Connector (CN353)
IRU_TF3: Connector (CN355)

Figure 8.2-37

8-33
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

H. Dismounting TSP PCB (IRU-TEMP1, IRU-TEMP2, IRU-TEMP3)

1. Dismount the Mosaic-IRU.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the sensor springs fixing on the
TSP PCB to be replaced.

Figure 8.2-38

3. Disconnect the connectors from the IRU_CN2 PCB.


IRU_TEMP1: Connector (CN357)
IRU_TEMP2: Connector (CN358)
IRU_TEMP3: Connector (CN359)

Figure 8.2-39

8-34
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

I. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the RTB.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.2-40

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.2-41

8-35
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

J. Dismounting IRU_CN2 PCB

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the Mosaic -front, and the
Mosaic-IRU.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the IRU_CN2 PCB.

3. Remove the three screws (M3×6) and dismount the IRU_CN2 PCB.

Figure 8.2-42

8-36
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.2.3 Replacement of Detector unit (DTR)


A. Dismounting halogen lamp

1. Dismount the Mosaic-DTR.

2. Disconnect the connector (LAMP) from the halogen lamp.

3. Loosen the screw (M3×35) on the lamp case. (The screw on the lamp case
cannot be removed.)

Figure 8.2-43

4. Pull out the lamp case by holding the handle.

Figure 8.2-44

5. Loosen the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the halogen lamp.

Figure 8.2-45

8-37
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting DTR fan assembly

1. Dismount the Mosaic-front.

2. Disconnect the connector (DTR-FAN) from the DTR fan assembly.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the DTR fan holder.

Figure 8.2-46

4. Remove the two screws (M3×30) and dismount the DTR fan assembly.

Figure 8.2-47

8-38
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting DTR assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and all Mosaic
covers.

2. Dismount the RCU assembly.

3. Disconnect the connectors (DTR-FAN, DTR, and LAMP) from the DTR fan
assembly, the DET_CPU PCB, and the halogen lamp respectively.

4. Hold and raise the handle of the WU assembly.

5. Dismount the Cuvette table assembly.

6. Remove the three screws (M3×10) and dismount the IRU case.

Figure 8.2-48

7. Remove the three screws (M4×10) and dismount the DTR assembly.

Figure 8.2-49

8-39
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.2.4 Replacement of Washing unit (WU)


A. Dismounting Wipe tip

1. Hold and raise the handle of the WU assembly.

2. Hold the wipe nozzle by fingers and pull out the wipe tip downward slowly.

 Height adjustment of the wipe tip

1. Apply uniformly the liquid gasket (1212) on the surface of the 2 to 3 mm width
area in the 5 to 10 mm away from the tip of the wipe nozzle.

Figure 8.2-50

 It is required 8 hours for the liquid gasket (1212) hardening after application.

2. Insert the new wipe tip into the bottom of the nozzle .

3. Power ON the operational PC and the analyzer.

4. Select the [Run(F5)] > [Daily Maintenance] screen. Click the [Initialization]
button to perform initialization.

5. Hold and move down the handle of the WU slowly.

8-40
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

6. Insert the wipe nozzle into the cuvette and adjust the wipe tip position (equal
width: A and A”, B and B”) from the inner surface of the cuvette by rotating it.

Figure 8.2-51

7. When attaching the wipe tip correctly, check that the length between the lowest
part of the wipe base and the tip of the wipe tip is 67 mm.

Figure 8.2-52

Check the following points after mounting the wipe tip.


● Not twisted in the tube.
● The wipe nozzle and the wipe base work smoothly.

8-41
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting WU nozzle base assembly

1. Disconnect all tubes from the supply/drain nozzles.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN611) from the WU-SEN PCB.

Figure 8.2-53

3. Loosen the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the WU nozzle base assembly.
The retaining washer is attached behind each screw.

Figure 8.2-54

 When mounting,
Place the edge of the WU nozzle base assembly and the boss against the
edge of the WU drive plate assembly and fix them.

Figure 8.2-55

8-42
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting Supply nozzle and Drain nozzle assembly.

1. Dismount the WU nozzle base assembly.

2. Loosen the hex socket head screw (M3×5) and dismount the supply nozzle and
the drain nozzle assembly.

Figure 8.2-56

 The supply nozzle and the drain nozzle are tightened by one hex socket head
screw. By loosening the screw, both nozzles are dismounted at one time.

3. For the drain nozzle replacement, disconnect each connector from the
WU_SEN PCB.
WU1: connector (CN612)
WU2: connector (CN613)
WU3: connector (CN614)
WU4: connector (CN616)

Figure 8.2-57

8-43
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Height adjustment of the supply/drain nozzles

1. Install the supply nozzle in the position (the WU nozzle base is positioned at
51-mm height from the bottom of the supply nozzle).

Figure 8.2-58

2. Install the drain nozzle in the position (the WU nozzle base is positioned at
55-mm height from the bottom of the drain nozzle).

Figure 8.2-59

8-44
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting wipe nozzle

1. Dismount the WU nozzle base assembly.

2. Dismount the wipe tip.

3. Loosen the screw (M3×5) and dismount the wipe nozzle.

Figure 8.2-60

 Position adjustment of mounting the wipe nozzle

1. Install the wipe nozzle in the position (the WU nozzle base is positioned at
64.5-mm height from the bottom of the wipe nozzle).

Figure 8.2-61

8-45
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting WU assembly

1. Dismount all the mosaic covers.

2. Disconnect all tubes from the supply/drain nozzles.

3. Loosen the two screws (M4×10) and lift up the WU assembly.

Figure 8.2-62

4. Disconnect each connector from the motor and the WU_CN PCB of the WU
assembly.

Figure 8.2-63

5. Dismount the WU assembly.

8-46
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

F. Dismounting WU_U/PT_R motor assembly and its timing belt

1. Dismount the WU assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the WU_CN PCB.

Figure 8.2-64

3. Remove the screw (M3×8) and either one of the two screws fixing the belt catch
10.

Figure 8.2-65

4. Remove the four screws (M3×6) and dismount the WU_U/PT_R motor
assembly.

Figure 8.2-66

8-47
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Dismount the timing belt from the WU assembly.

Figure 8.2-67

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 9.81 to 12.7N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type -I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 6mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 104mm

Figure 8.2-68

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of t he belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.
 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the four screws (M3×6).

4. Adjust the tension by moving the WU_U/PT_R motor assembly in the arrow
direction.

Figure 8.2-69

8-48
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

G. Dismounting WU_SEN PCB

1. Dismount the WU nozzle base assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the WU_SEN PCB.

3. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the WU_SEN PCB.

Figure 8.2-70

H. Dismounting WU_CN PCB.

1. Dismount the WU assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the WU_CN PCB.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the WU_CN PCB.

Figure 8.2-71

8-49
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

I. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the WU assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the SENSA PCB.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.2-72

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.2-73

8-50
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.3 Stirrer unit (MIX)

8.3.1 Replacement of Stirrer unit 1 (MIX1) and Stirrer unit 2 (MIX2)


 The Stirrer unit 1 and the Stirrer unit 2 have same structure as the MIX unit
assembly.

A. Dismounting Stirrer paddle

1. Hold and raise the arm of the MIX assembly.

2. Loosen the hex socket head screw (M3×3) and dismount the stirrer paddle.

Figure 8.3-1

 Position adjustment of mounting the stirrer paddle

1. Set the new stirrer paddle on the MIX paddle jig.

Figure 8.3-2

8-51
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

2. Attach the upper part of the MIX paddle jig on the MIX arm base.

 Attach the upper part of the MIX paddle jig on the MIX arm base precisely. If
incorrect fixing, it may cause malfunction in the Stirrer unit.

Figure 8.3-3

3. Tighten the hex socket head screw (M3×3) and fix the stirrer paddle.

8-52
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting MIX unit assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and all Mosaic covers.

2. Disconnect the connectors (MIX1U from MIX1, and MIX2U from MIX2) from
MIX_U motor assembly, the connectors (MIX1K from MIX1 and MIX2K from
MIX2) from MIX_K motor assembly, and the connector (UP) from the SENSA
PCB.

Figure 8.3-4

3. Disconnect the two tubes from the MIX trough assembly.

Figure 8.3-5

8-53
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the three screws (M4×10) and dismount the MIX unit assembly.

Figure 8.3-6

C. Dismounting MIX_K motor assembly

1. Dismount the MIX arm cover.

Figure 8.3-7

2. Loosen the screw and dismount the stirrer paddle.

Figure 8.3-8

8-54
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Disconnect the harness from the MIX_K motor assembly.

4. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the MIX_K motor assembly.

Figure 8.3-9

D. Dismounting MIX_U motor assembly

1. Dismount the MIX assembly.

2. Remove the four screws (M3×10) and dismount the MIX motor plate.

Figure 8.3-10

3. Remove the four screws (M4×10) and dismount the MIX_U motor assembly.

Figure 8.3-11

8-55
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the MIX assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.3-12

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between t he SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.3-13

8-56
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.4 Pipette unit (SPT, RTP)

8.4.1 Replacement of Sample pipette unit (SPT)


A. Dismount SPT pipette assembly

1. Remove the PT arm cover. The PT arm cover is fixed in its arm base by the
inside tabs.

2. Disconnect the connector (J2).

Figure 8.4-1

3. Fix the pipette by spanner (subtense 5.5mm) and rotate the PT joint (tube side)
by hand.

Figure 8.4-2

 Do not rotate the spanner.

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the pipette.

8-57
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Loosen the hex socket head screw (M3×5) and pull out the SPT pipette
assembly.

Figure 8.4-3

 Position adjustment of mounting the SPT pipette

1. Follow the reverse procedure of the step 2 to 4 and install the new SPT pipette
assembly.

 When tightening the hex socket head screw, pay attention to the tigh tening
torque.
Tighten the screw at 90-degree rightward when placing the screw against the
pipette.

8-58
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

2. Check the mounting position of the SPT pipette assembly.

 The height from the tip of the pipette to the PT arm base is 128.5mm.
 Make sure to move smoothly up and down (in the arrow direction) with holding
the pipette.

Figure 8.4-4

8-59
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting the SPT assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R and all Mosaic covers.

2. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube from the SPPS
assembly.

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the pipette.

 If the M6 joint is too tight to loosen, use long-nose pliers. When using
long-nose pliers, cover the M6 joint with a cloth, etc. to prevent damage.

 Prevent deformation or damage of the tube tip.

Figure 8.4-5

8-60
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Disconnect the two connectors (J1, J6) from the MOTOR-SEN_CN PCB.

Figure 8.4-6

4. Remove the three screws (M4×10) and dismount the SPT assembly.

Figure 8.4-7

8-61
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting WU_U/PT_R motor assembly and PT_R timing belt

1. Dismount the SPT assembly.

2. Loosen the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SPT stopper.

Figure 8.4-8

3. Remove the three screws (M3×10) and dismount the WU_U/PT_R motor
assembly.

Figure 8.4-9

8-62
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Dismount the timing belt from the SPT assembly.

Figure 8.4-10

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 9.8 to 12.7N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type -I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 6mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 39mm

Figure 8.4-11

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.

 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned range, take the following
steps:

3. Loosen the three screws (M3×10).

4. Adjust the tension by moving the WU_U/PT_R motor assembly in the arrow
direction.

Figure 8.4-12

8-63
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting PT_U motor assembly and its timing belt.

1. Dismount the SPT assembly.

2. Remove the four screws (M4×15) and dismount the PT_U motor assembly.

Figure 8.4-13

3. Remove the screw (M3×8) and either one of the two screws fixing the belt catch
10.

Figure 8.4-14

4. Dismount the timing belt from the SPT assembly.

Figure 8.4-15

8-64
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type -I”

5. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 147mm

Figure 8.4-16

6. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.

 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

7. Loosen the four screws (M4×15).

8. Adjust the tension by moving the PT_U motor assembly up and down in the
arrow directions.

Figure 8.4-17

8-65
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting MOTOR_SEN_CN PCB

1. Dismount the SPT assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the MOTOR_SEN_CN PCB.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the MOTOR_SEN_CN PCB.

Figure 8.4-18

F. Dismounting SENSA PCB (for rotation)

1. Dismount the SPT assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the SENSA PCB (for rotation).

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.4-19

8-66
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.4-20

G. Dismounting SENSA PCB (vertically positioned)

1. Dismount the SPT assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the SENSA PCB (vertically positioned).

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.4-21

8-67
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.4-22

8-68
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

H. Dismounting SEN_LL/DL PCB

1. Dismount the PT arm cover.

Figure 8.4-23

2. Disconnect all connectors from the SEN_LL/DL PCB.

3. Remove the screw (M3×8) and dismount the PT nozzle guard.

Figure 8.4-24

4. Remove the screw (M3×8) and dismount the SEN_LL/DL PCB.

Figure 8.4-25

8-69
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.4.2 Replacement of Reagent pipette unit (RPT)


A. Dismounting RPT pipette assembly

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the RPT pipette, refer to “8.4.1 A. Dismounting the SPT pipette
assembly.”

B. Dismounting RPT assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and all Mosaic covers.

2. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
RPPR assembly.

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the pipette.
 If the M6 joint is too tight to loosen, use long-nose pliers. When using
long-nose pliers, cover the M6 joint with a cloth, etc. to prevent damage.

 Prevent deformation or damage of the tube tip.

Figure 8.4-26

8-70
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Disconnect the two connectors (J1, J6) from the MOTOR-SEN_CN PCB.

Figure 8.4-27

4. Remove the three screws (M4×10) and dismount the RPT assembly.

Figure 8.4-28

8-71
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting WU_U/PT_R motor assembly and PT_R timing belt

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the WU_U/PT_R motor assembly and its timing belt, refer to “8.4.1 C.
Dismounting WU_U/PT_R motor assembly and PT_R timing belt.”

D. Dismounting PT_U motor and its timing belt

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the PT_U motor assembly and its timing belt, refer to “8.4.1 D.
Dismounting PT_U motor assembly and its timing belt.”

E. Dismounting MOTOR_SEN_CN PCB

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the MOTOR_SEN_CN PCB, refer to “8.4.1 E. Dismounting
MOTOR_SEN_CN PCB.”

F. Dismounting SENSA PCB (for rotation)

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the SENSA PCB, refer to “8.4.1 F. Dismounting SENSA PCB (for
rotation).”

G. Dismounting SENSA PCB (vertically positioned)

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the SENSA PCB, refer to “8.4.1 G. Dismounting SENSA PCB
(vertically positioned).”

H. Dismounting SEN_LL/DL PCB.

The RPT assembly has same structure as the SPT assembly.


For dismounting the SEN_LL/DL PCB, refer to “8.4.1 H. Dismounting SEN_LL/DL
PCB.”

8-72
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.5 Trough unit (TR)

A. Dismounting SPT trough assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and the Mosaic -front.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) on the SPT trough assembly.

Figure 8.5-1

3. Disconnect the two tubes (one for the supply tube, the other for the drain tube )
from the SPT trough assembly.

Figure 8.5-2

4. Dismount the SPT trough assembly.

8-73
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismount RPT trough assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and the Mosaic -front.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) on the RPT trough assembly.

Figure 8.5-3

3. Disconnect the two tubes (one for the supply tube, the other for the drain tube)
from the RPT trough assembly.

Figure 8.5-4

4. Dismount the RPT trough assembly.

8-74
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting MIX trough assembly (MIX1 and MIX2)

1. Dismount all the mosaic covers.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the MIX trough.

Figure 8.5-5

3. Disconnect the two tubes (one for the supply tube, the other for the drain tube)
from the MIX trough assembly.

Figure 8.5-6

8-75
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting Trough chamber assembly.

1. Dismount the side panel R, the rear panel, the Mosaic-front, and the
Mosaic-right.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN509) from the IRU_CN1 PCB.

Figure 8.5-7

3. Dismount the Subtank assembly.

4. Disconnect all tubes connecting to the Trough chamber assembly.

5. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the Trough chamber assembly.

Figure 8.5-8

8-76
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting the Trough chamber float sensor assembly

1. Dismount the side panel R and the rear panel.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN509) from the IRU_CN1 PCB.

Figure 8.5-9

3. Remove the cap at the upper part of the Trough chamber assembly and
dismount the Trough chamber float sensor.

Figure 8.5-10

8-77
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.6 Sample container unit (ASP)

A. Dismounting ASP assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, all Mosaic covers, and the front
panel.

2. Disconnect the connectors (LED and CN113) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB and
the F-LED PCB.

Figure 8.6-1

3. Disconnect the connectors (CN111, CN118, CN119, CN120, and CN122 for
BCR: option) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB of the RCU assembly.

Figure 8.6-2

4. Disconnect the connector (ASPSW) from the Interlock switch.

8-78
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Remove the four screws (M4×10) and dismount the front frame.

Figure 8.6-3

6. Remove the four screws (M4×10) and dismount the ASP assembly.

Figure 8.6-4

8-79
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting ASP case assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, all Mosaic covers, and the front
panel.

2. Disconnect the connectors (CN119, CN120) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB of the
RCU assembly.

Figure 8.6-5

3. Disconnect the connector (ASPSW) from the Interlock swi tch.

4. Dismount the ASP cover assembly, the ASP inner tray, and the ASP outer tray.

5. Remove the three hex socket head screws (M4×15) and dismount the S tray up
base.

Figure 8.6-6

8-80
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

6. Remove the two hex socket head screws (M4×6) and dismount the Tray lower
base.

Figure 8.6-7

7. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the ASP case assembly.

Figure 8.6-8

8-81
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting IRU/ASP motor assembly and its timing belt.

1. Dismount the ASP assembly.

2. Remove the four screws (M4×15) and dismount the IRU/ASP motor assembly.

Figure 8.6-9

3. Dismount the timing belt from the ASP assembly.

Figure 8.6-10

8-82
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type -I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 87mm

Figure 8.6-11

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.

 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the four screws (M4×15).

4. Adjust the tension by moving the IRU/ASP motor assembly in the arrow
direction.

Figure 8.6-12

8-83
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel.

2. Dismount the Mosaic-front.

3. Dismount the ASP assembly.

4. Disconnect the connector from the SENSA PCB.

5. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.6-13

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.6-14

8-84
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting Interlock switch assembly

1. Dismount the side panel R and the Mosaic-front.

2. Dismount the connector from the Interlock switch.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×15) and dismount the Interlock switch.

Figure 8.6-15

F. Dismounting ASP hall sensor assembly (ASP cover).

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and the
Mosaic-front.

2. Dismount the ASP cover assembly.

3. Disconnect the connector (CN119) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB of the RCU
assembly.

Figure 8.6-16

8-85
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the screw (M2×5) and dismount the ASP hall sensor assembly.

 The ASP hall sensors in the ASP cover and the STAT cover are common parts
in the ASP hall sensor assembly.

Figure 8.6-17

G. Dismounting ASP hall sensor assembly (STAT cover).

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, a nd the
Mosaic-front.

2. Dismount the ASP cover assembly.

3. Disconnect the connector (CN120) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB of the RCU
assembly.

Figure 8.6-18

8-86
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the screw (M2×5) and dismount the ASP hall sensor assembly.

 The ASP hall sensors in the ASP cover and the STAT cover are common parts
in the ASP hall sensor assembly.

Figure 8.6-19

H. Dismounting ASPBCR assembly (CCD). (option)

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and the
Mosaic-front.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN122) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

3. Remove the three screws (M3×8) for the ASPBCR (CCD).

Figure 8.6-20

8-87
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

I. Dismounting ASPBCR assembly (Laser). (option)

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and the
Mosaic-front.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN122) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) for the ASPBCR (Laser).

Figure 8.6-21

8-88
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.7 Reagent container unit (RCU)

A. Dismounting RCU assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the Mosaic -front, and the front
panel.

2. Disconnect the connectors (CN111, CN118, CN119, CN120, and CN122) from
the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

Figure 8.7-1

3. Disconnect the connector (CN113) to the F-LED PCB from the ASP/RCU-DRV
PCB.

4. Disconnect the connector (CN103) to the PSU from the ASP/RCU -DRV PCB.

5. Disconnect the connector (CN101) to the CNU from the ASP/RCU -DRV PCB.

6. Disconnect the connector (CN102) to the ISE (option) from the ASP/RCU-DRV
PCB.

8-89
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

7. Remove the four screws (M4×10) and dismount the front frame.

Figure 8.7-2

8. Remove the four screws (M4×10).

Figure 8.7-3

9. Disconnect the drain tube from the RCU.

10. Dismount the RCU assembly in the arrow direction.

Figure 8.7-4

8-90
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting RCUBCR assembly (CCD) (option)

1. Dismount the RCU assembly.

2. Disconnect the connector (CN121) to the barcode reader from the


ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

3. Remove the three screws (M4×10) and dismount the RCUBCR assembly.

Figure 8.7-5

C. Dismounting ASP/RCU-DRV PCB

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and the fron t panel.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

3. Remove the six screws (M3×8) and dismount the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

Figure 8.7-6

8-91
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting RCU motor assembly and its timing belt

1. Dismount the RCU assembly.

2. Remove the four screws (M4×15) and dismount the RCU motor assembly.

Figure 8.7-7

3. Dismount the timing belt from the RCU assembly.

Figure 8.7-8

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type -I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 101mm

8-92
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

Figure 8.7-9

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.

 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the four screws (M4×15).

4. Adjust the tension by moving the RCU motor assembly in the arrow direction s.

Figure 8.7-10

8-93
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the RCU assembly.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the RCU drv plt on the
ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

Figure 8.7-11

4. Disconnect the connector from the SENSA PCB.

5. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.7-12

8-94
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.7-13

8-95
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

F. Dismounting RCU fan assembly (PE1, PE2)

1. Dismount the RCU assembly.

2. Disconnect the connectors (PE1: CN105, PE2: CN104) from th e ASP/RCU-DRV


PCB.

3. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the mounting parts including the
RCU fan assembly.

Figure 8.7-14

4. Remove the two screws (M3×35) and dismount the RCU fan assembly out of the
mounting parts.

Figure 8.7-15

 When mounting, mount the RCU fan to the downward arrow direction.

Figure 8.7-16

8-96
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

G. Dismounting RCU peltier assembly (PE1, PE2)

1. Dismount the RCU cover assembly and the RCU tray assembly.

2. Dismount the RCU fan assembly.


For the dismounting procedure, refer to "9.7. F. Dismounting RCU fan assembly
(PE1, PE2).”

3. Dismount the two screws (M3×10).

 The screw area of this assembly is covered with the silicon rubber for
waterproof. Remove the silicon rubber with tweezers first. Then remove the
screws.

Figure 8.7-17

4. Disconnect each connector (PE1: CN106, PE2: CN107) from the


ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.

5. Dismount the RCU peltier assembly (PE1, PE2) at the bottom of the RCU.

Figure 8.7-18

8-97
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

<Dismounting procedure for PE1 and PE2>

6. Wipe the heat sink with alcohol-moistened gauze and apply a thin layer of the
heat sink (HSC-50) on the PE cold plate evenly.

Figure 8.7-19

7. Wipe the facing surfaces of both the RCU peltier assembly and the RCU with
alcohol-moistened gauze and apply a thin layer of the heat sink (HSC-50) on the
surface evenly.

8. Coat the silicon rubber over the surface of the screws for waterproof.
Tighten the two screws (M3×10) and mount the RCU peltier assembly. Cover
the tightened screws with the silicon rubber.

Figure 8.7-20

9. Fill the clearance between the RCU case and the RCU peltier assembly with the
silicon rubber.

Figure 8.7-21

8-98
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

H. Dismounting RCU hall sensor assembly.

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, the front panel, and the
Mosaic-front.

2. Dismount the RCU cover assembly.

3. Disconnect the connector (CN116) from the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB of the RCU
assembly.

4. Remove the sensor packing.

Figure 8.7-22

5. Remove the two screws (M2×5) and dismount the RCU hall sensor.

Figure 8.7-23

8-99
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.8 Pump unit (PP)

8.8.1 Replacement of Sample pump unit (SPPS)


A. Dismounting SPPS assembly

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Disconnect the connector (SPP) from the SENSA PCB.

3. Disconnect the connector (SPP-EV) from the SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

4. Turn the three M6 joints counterclockwise and remove the three tubes
connecting to the syringe S1.4 and the SPP/RPP solenoid valve (COM, NO).

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the pipette.
 If the M6 joint is too tight to loosen, use long-nose pliers. When using
long-nose pliers, cover the M6 joint with a cloth, etc. to prevent damage.

 Prevent deformation or damage of the tube tip.

Figure 8.8-1

8-101
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the SPPS assembly.

Figure 8.8-2

6. Disconnect the connector from the SPPS motor.

B. Dismounting SPPS assembly (option: clot detection sensor)

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Disconnect the connector (SPP) from the SENSA PCB.

3. Disconnect the connector (SPP-EV) from the SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

4. Turn the three M6 joints counterclockwise and remove the three tubes
connecting to the SPP/RPP solenoid valve (COM, NO) and the clot detection
sensor.

Figure 8.8-3

8-102
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Remove the four screws (M3×8) and dismount the SPPS assembly.

Figure 8.8-4

6. Disconnect the connector from the SPPS motor.

C. Dismounting syringe S1.4

1. Dismount the SPPS assembly.

2. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
syringe S1.4.

Figure 8.8-5

8-103
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Remove the hex socket head screw (M4×22) and dismount the syringe block.

Figure 8.8-6

4. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the fixing plate for syringe head.

Figure 8.8-7

5. Dismount the syringe S1.4 from the SPPS assembly.

Figure 8.8-8

8-104
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting SPP/RPP solenoid valve

1. Dismount the SPPS assembly.

2. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

Figure 8.8-9

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

Figure 8.8-10

8-105
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the SPPS assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.8-11

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.8-12

8-106
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.8.2 Replacement of Sample pump unit (SPPW)


A. Dismounting SPPW/RPPW assembly (from SPPW side).

 The SPPW and the RPPW is a common unit as the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Disconnect the connector (SPP) from the SENSA PCB.

3. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
syringe S7.2.

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the pipette.
 If the M6 joint is too tight to loosen, use long-nose pliers. When using
long-nose pliers, cover the M6 joint with a cloth, etc. to prevent damage.

 Prevent deformation or damage of the tube tip.

Figure 8.8-13

8-107
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

Figure 8.8-14

5. Disconnect the connector from the motor assembly.

B. Dismounting syringe S7.2

1. Dismount the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

2. Remove the hex socket head screw (M4×22) and dismount the syringe block.

Figure 8.8-15

8-108
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the fixing plate for syringe head.

Figure 8.8-16

4. Dismount the syringe S7.2 from the SPPS assembly.

Figure 8.8-17

8-109
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.8-18

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.8-19

8-110
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting SPPW/RPP timing belt.

1. Dismount the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the belt catch 10.

Figure 8.8-20

3. Loosen the two screws (M3×6) for the shaft pulley.

Figure 8.8-21

4. Loosen the hex nut (M3).

5. Loosen the hex socket head screw


(M3×15).

6. Dismount the SPPW/RPP timing belt.

Figure 8.8-22

8-111
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type-I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 86mm

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

Figure 8.8-23

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.
 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the two screws (M3×6) for the shaft pulley.

4. Loosen the screw (M3×15) and adjust the tension by moving the shaft pulley
vertically as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.8-24

5. After adjusting the belt tension within the acceptable range, tighten the four
screws (M4×12) and the hex nut (M3).

8-112
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.8.3 Replacement of Reagent pump unit (RPP)


A. Dismounting RPPR assembly

1. Dismount the side panel L.

2. Disconnect the connector (RPP) from the SENSA PCB.

3. Disconnect the connector (RPP-EV) from the SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

4. Turn the three M6 joints counterclockwise and remove the tubes connecting to
the syringe R3.2 and the SPP/RPP solenoid valve (COM, NO).

Figure 8.8-25

5. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the RPPR assembly.

Figure 8.8-26

6. Disconnect the connector from the RPPR motor.

8-113
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting syringe R3.2

1. Dismount the RPPR assembly.

2. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
syringe R3.2.

Figure 8.8-27

3. Remove the hex socket head screw (M4×22) and dismount the syringe block.

Figure 8.8-28

4. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the valve holder R-1.

8-114
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

Figure 8.8-29

5. Remove the two hex spacers.

Figure 8.8-30

6. Dismount the syringe R3.2 from the RPPR assembly.

Figure 8.8-31

8-115
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

1. Dismount the RPPR assembly.

2. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

Figure 8.8-32

3. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the SPP/RPP solenoid valve.

Figure 8.8-33

8-116
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.8-34

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.8-35

8-117
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.8.4 Replacement of Reagent pump unit (RPPW)


A. Dismounting SPPW/RPPW assembly (from RPPW side).

 The SPPW and the RPPW is a common unit as the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

1. Dismount the side panel L.

2. Disconnect the connector (RPP) from the SENSA PCB.

3. Turn the M6 joint counterclockwise and remove the tube connecting to the
syringe S7.2.

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the pipette.
 If the M6 joint is too tight to loosen, use long-nose pliers. When using
long-nose pliers, cover the M6 joint with a cloth, etc. to prevent damage.

 Prevent deformation or damage of the tube tip.

Figure 8.8-36

4. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the SPPW/RPPW assembly.

Figure 8.8-37

8-118
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Disconnect the connector from the motor assembly.

B. Dismounting syringe S7.2

The SPPW has the common structure with the RPPW.


For dismounting the syringe S7.2, refer to “8.8.2 B. Dismounting Syringe S7.2.”

C. Dismounting SENSA PCB.

The SPPW has the common structure with the RPPW.


For dismounting the SENSA PCB, refer to “8.8.2 C. Dismounting SENSA PCB.”

D. Dismounting SPPW/RPP timing belt.

The SPPW has the common structure with the RPPW.


For dismounting the SPPW/RPP timing belt, refer to “8.8.2 D. Dismounting
SPPW/RPP timing belt.”

8-119
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.8.5 Replacement of Wash pump unit (WPP)


A. Dismounting WPP assembly

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Disconnect the connector (RPP) from the SENSA PCB.

3. Turn the eight M6 joints counterclockwise and remove the tubes connecting to
the WPP solenoid valve.

 During this procedure, any liquid dripping may be recognized from the tube
connections or the nozzles.
 If the M6 joint is too tight to loosen, use long-nose pliers. When using
long-nose pliers, cover the M6 joint with a cloth, etc. to prevent damage.
 Prevent deformation or damage of the tube tip.

Figure 8.8-38

4. Disconnect the four connectors (WPP-EV1, WPP-EV2, WPP-EV3, and


WPP-EV4) from the WPP solenoid valve.

8-120
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the WPP assembly.

Figure 8.8-39

6. Disconnect the connector from the WPP motor assembly.

B. Dismounting syringe W7.2 and the WPP solenoid valve.

 The WPP assembly consists of the four syringe pumps (WPP1 to WPP4).

 The dismounting procedure for the syringe W7.2 (WPP1 to WPP4) is same as
that for the WPP solenoid valve.

1. Dismount the WPP assembly.

2. Remove the hex socket head screw (M4×22) and dismount the syringe block.

Figure 8.8-40

8-121
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Remove the three screws (M3×6) and dismount the EV holder.

Figure 8.8-41

4. Remove the two hex spacers and dismount the fixing plate for syringe head.

Figure 8.8-42

5. Dismount the syringe W7.2 from the RPPR assembly.

6. Turn the WPP solenoid valve counterclockwise and dismount it from the syringe
R3.2. Dismount the valve packing.

Figure 8.8-43

8-122
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting SENSA PCB

1. Dismount the WPP assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the SENSA PCB.

Figure 8.8-44

 Clearance adjustment of SENSA PCB


Check that there are even clearances (above and below) between the SENSA
PCB and the zero point dog.

Figure 8.8-45

8-123
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting WPP timing belt 160

1. Dismount the WPP assembly.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the belt catch 10.

Figure 8.8-46

3. Loosen the two screws (M3×6) for the shaft pulley.

4. Loosen the hex nut (M3).

5. Loosen the hex socket head screw (M3×15).

Figure 8.8-47

8-124
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

6. Move up the shaft pulley and dismount the WPP timing belt 160.

Figure 8.8-48

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type-I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 54mm

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

Figure 8.8-49

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.
 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the two screws (M3×6) for the shaft pulley.

8-125
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Loosen the screw (M3×15) and adjust the tension by moving the shaft pulley up
and down in the arrow directions.

Figure 8.8-50

5. After adjusting the belt tension within the acceptable range, tighten the four
screws (M4×12) and the hex nut (M3).

8-126
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting WPP timing belt 192.

1. Dismount the WPP assembly.

2. Loosen the hex nut (M3).

3. Loosen the hex socket head screw (M3×15).

Figure 8.8-51

4. Loosen the four screws (M4×12).

Figure 8.8-52

8-127
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

5. Move up the shaft pulley and dismount the WPP timing belt 192.

Figure 8.8-53

 Adjust the belt tension.


Initial belt tension: 16.7 to 22.6N
Equipment used for this measurement: tension meter “Doctor Tension Type-I”

1. Set the tension meter as follows.


Belt width: 10mm
Belt weight: 0.013kg/m
Belt span: 54mm

2. Measure the belt tension by gently hitting the midst of the belt span with a
screwdriver, etc.

Figure 8.8-54

 The tension of the timing belt may vary depending on the measuring spots.
Perform measurement several times consecutively.
 If the belt tension is out of the above-mentioned acceptable range, take the
following steps:

3. Loosen the four screws (M4×12).

8-128
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Loosen the screw (M3×15) and adjust the tension by moving the motor holder
up and down in the arrow directions.

Figure 8.8-55

5. After adjusting the belt tension within the acceptable range, tighten the four
screws (M4×12) and the hex nut (M3).

8-129
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.8.6 Replacement of Subtank unit (SUBTK)


A. Dismounting SUBTK

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Remove the three screw caps at the upper part of the subtank and dismount the
subtank float sensor assembly and its tubes.

Figure 8.8-56

8-130
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.9 Supply water unit (SWU)

A. Dismounting SWU assembly

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Remove the two screws (M3×8).

Figure 8.9-1

3. Pull out the SWU assembly halfway out of the analyzer and disconnect the three
connectors (SWU-LEAK, SWU1, and SWU2).

Figure 8.9-2

8-131
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the 10 tubes connecting to the diaphragm pumps, the two tubes from
the relay connectors, and the tube from the SWU chamber (option as the ISE
drain tube).

Figure 8.9-3

5. Dismount the SWU assembly.

8-132
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting Leak sensor assembly and sponge part.

1. Dismount the SWU assembly.

2. Remove the screw (M3×8) and the connecting lines from the leak sensor
assembly. Dismount the leak sensor assembly.

Figure 8.9-4

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the sponge from the leak sensor
assembly.

Figure 8.9-5

8-133
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting Diaphragm pump

 The SWU assembly consists of the diaphragm pump of each of the WU (1 -5),
the SPT, the RPT, the MIX (1-2), and the SUBTK.

The following list indicates three types of the diaphragm pumps.


Item Type Location
1 Diaphragm pump APN20TD2 WU1, WU2
assembly WU1-2
2 Diaphragm pump APN20D2 WU3, WU4,
assembly SPT, RPT, MIX1, MIX2, SUBTK
3 Diaphragm pump APN30D2 WU5
assembly WU5

Figure 8.9-6

 The dismounting procedure is same for all diaphragm pumps. Here is


described on the dismounting procedure for the WU1.

1. Dismount the SWU assembly.

2. Remove the relay connector.

8-134
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the diaphragm pump.

Figure 8.9-7

4. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the pump holder from the
diaphragm pump.

Figure 8.9-8

8-135
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting Check valve

 The check valves are installed at the four diaphragm pumps (SPT, RPT, MIX1
and MIX2).

 The dismounting procedure is same for all check valves.

Figure 8.9-9

1. Dismount the SWU assembly.

2. Disconnect the tubes connecting at the upper and the lower parts of the check
valve. Replace the check valve with the new one.
The liquid flows in one direction in the check valve. Mount the check valve in the
direction of the arrow on the side of the check valve pointing to the analyzer.

Figure 8.9-10

8-136
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting Inline filter N

 The inline filter N is installed at each of the four diaphragm pumps (WU1 to 4).

 The dismounting procedure is same for all inline filter N.

Figure 8.9-11

1. Dismount the SWU assembly.

2. Disconnect the tubes from both of the upper and the lower parts of the inline
filter N. Replace the inline filter N with the new one.
The liquid flows in one direction within the inline filter N. Mount the inline filter N
in the direction of the arrow on the side of the inline filter N pointing to the
diaphragm pump.

Figure 8.9-12

8-137
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.10 Option

8.10.1 Replacement of ISE unit (ISE)

 Prior to dismounting the ISE unit, click the [ISE Drain] button from the [Daily
Maintenance] screen to perform drainage of the remaining liquid in the ISE
unit.

1. Dismount the side panel L, the side panel R, and the Mosaic-front.

2. Disconnect the tubes from the tube connectors R1 and L1.

Figure 8.10-1

3. Disconnect the connector (ISE) from the rear of the ISE unit.

Figure 8.10-2

8-138
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and pull out the SWU.

Figure 8.10-3

5. Disconnect the ISE drain tube from the SWU chamber.

Figure 8.10-4

6. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and dismount the ISE unit.

Figure 8.10-5

8-139
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.10.2 Replacement of Reagent barcode reader (RCU_BCR)


For dismounting procedure, refer to “8.7.B. Dismounting RCUBCR assembly (CCD)
(option).”

8.10.3 Replacement of Sample barcode reader (ASP_BCR)

A. Dismounting Sample barcode reader (CCD)

For dismounting procedure, refer to “8.6.H. Dismounting ASPBCR assembly (CCD)


(option).”

B. Dismounting Sample barcode reader (laser)

For dismounting procedure, refer to “8.6.I. Dismounting ASPBCR assembly (Laser)


(option).”

8-140
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.10.4 Replacement of Degassing unit (DGU)

A. Dismounting DGU

1. Dismount the side panel R, the Mosaic-front, and the Mosaic-right.

2. Disconnect the three tubes.

 Two tubes from the S-R divider assembly (one between the S-R divider
assembly and the SPPS, the other between the S-R divider assembly and the
RPPR)

Figure 8.10-6

 One tube from the degasser module (M6 joint between the degasser module
and the subtank)

Figure 8.10-7

3. Disconnect the connector (OP-EV) from the degassing solenoid valve assembly.

8-141
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Remove the three screws (M3×8) and pull out the DGU.

Figure 8.10-8

5. Disconnect the connecting line from the rear of the DGU.

 The silicon tube from the Degassing pump (between the degassing pump and
the trough chamber)

Figure 8.10-9

6. Disconnect the connector from the rear of the pressure SW and the connector
(OF-PUMP) from the Degassing pump.

7. Dismount the DGU from the analyzer.

8-142
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

B. Dismounting Degasser module (M60-1600)

1. Dismount the DGU.

2. Disconnect the two connecting lines.

 One connecting line from the upper part of the degasser module to the M6 joint

Figure 8.10-10

 One connecting line (silicon tube) from the rear of the degasser module

Figure 8.10-11

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) at the rear of the DGU.

Figure 8.10-12

8-143
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

4. Dismount the degasser module (M60-1600) from the analyzer.

Figure 8.10-13

8-144
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

C. Dismounting Pressure SW (DP-101Z)

1. Dismount the DGU.

2. Disconnect the connecting line from the rear of the pressure SW (DP-101Z).

Figure 8.10-14

3. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the pressure SW (DP-101Z).

Figure 8.10-15

8-145
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

D. Dismounting Degassing solenoid valve assembly

1. Dismount the DGU.

2. Disconnect the two connecting lines from the degassing solenoid valve.

Figure 8.10-16

3. Dismount the pressure SW (DP-101Z).

4. Remove the two screws (M2.5×5) from the bottom of the degassing solenoid
valve and dismount the Degassing solenoid valve assembly.

Figure 8.10-17

8-146
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

E. Dismounting Degassing pump assembly

1. Dismount the DGU.

2. Disconnect the connecting line from the Degassing pump assembly.

Figure 8.10-18

3. Remove the two screws (M3×8) and dismount the Degassing pump assembly
with the Base APN30.

Figure 8.10-19

4. Remove the two screws (M3×8) from the bottom of the Base APN30 and
dismount the Degassing pump assembly.

Figure 8.10-20

8-147
Chapter 8: Parts replacement

8.10.5 Replacement of Clot detection sensor (CDS)

1. Dismount the side panel R.

2. Disconnect the connector (PS J1) from the CDS PCB.

3. Disconnect the connecting line from the Clot detection sensor.

4. Remove the two screws (M3×6) and dismount the CDS PCB.

Figure 8.10-21

8-148
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Chapter 9 Position adjustment of unit


Here is described on the position adjustment for each unit when dismounting or
repairing the unit.
For dismounting or replacement procedures for each unit, refer to “Chapter 8 Parts
replacement.”

 Hold the neck of the shaft to rotate SPT/RPT/MIX1/MIX2 unit vertically.


 When mounting the unit to the analyzer, apply the fixing plate for placing the
unit base against.
 Prior to position adjustment, power the analyzer OFF and rotate the SPT or the
RPT to the trough area. Make sure to position the pipette at the center of the
trough (not to hit against the wall.)

9-1
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.1 List of position adjustment jigs


For position adjustment, the following jigs and tools are required.

A. Jigs

Item Description Figure


SPT/WU ‧ For SPT position adjustment in the IRU
positioning ‧ For WU nozzle position adjustment
jig (using the jig upside down.)
‧ Used as height adjustment jig base

RPT/WU ‧ For RPT position adjustment in the IRU


positioning ‧ For WU nozzle position adjustment
jig (using the jig upside down.)
‧ Used as height adjustment jig base

MIX ‧ For MIX position adjustment.


positioning ‧ Used as height adjustment jig base
jig

Height ‧ For height adjustment of MIX1, MIX2,


adjustment SPT, RPT, and WU.
jig

9-2
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

IRU table ‧ For IRU zero position adjustment


adjuster

ASP ‧Used for position adjustment of the SPT


positioning aspirating position at the outer and midst
jig layers of ASP.
(OU-CEN)

ASP ‧ Used for position adjustment of the SPT


positioning aspirating position at the inner layer of
jig (IN) ASP

ASP cover ‧ Turn the ASP cover sensor ON.


dummy jig

B. Required Tools

Item Type
Screwdriver + Long Screwdriver No.2
Screwdriver No. 2
Hex Wrench Required size: 1.5 mm

9-3
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.2 Required position adjustment


When dismounting each unit from the chassis, the various position adjustments are
required depending on the unit. For position adjustment, refer to the following list.

Position adjustment

SPT ASP SPT trough ISE RPT RCU RPT trough

Section 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10

SPT O ∆ ∆ ∆ × × ×
ASP × O × × × × ×
SPT trough × × O × × × ×
Unit name

ISE × × × O × × ×
RPT × × × × O ∆ ∆
RCU × × × × × O ×
RPT trough × × × × × × O

Position adjustment

MIX1 MIX1 trough MIX2 MIX2 trough WU IRU

Section 10.11 10.12 10.13 10.14 10.15 10.16

MIX1 O ∆ × × × ×
MIX1 trough × O × × × ×
Unit name

MIX2 × × O ∆ × ×
MIX2 trough × × × O × ×
WU × × × × O
IRU × × × × × O
O: Adjustment required, △: Check required. Only if misalignment, adjustment required.
X: No adjustment or check required.

9-4
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.3 Preparation
Perform the following preparation prior to the unit position adjustment.

1. Power the analyzer OFF and shut down the operational PC.

2. Dismount all the mosaic covers. For the procedure, refer to “9.1.1. Cover (CVR)
replacement.”

3. Perform level adjustment of the analyzer. For the procedure, refer to “4.3.4
Level adjustment.”

4. Loosen the fixing screws of the unit to be adjusted.


When the unit is completely dismounted, tentatively fasten the fixing screws of
the unit with placing against the fixing plate on the chassis.

5. Connect the disconnected cables and tubes of each unit.

6. Hold and move the SPT, the RPT, the MIX1, or the MIX2 to the trough area by
hand. Make sure to position at the enough space (not to hit other parts.)

7. Hold and move upward the WU by hand.

8. Mount the ASP or RCU cover.

9-5
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.4 SPT position adjustment


Here is described on the adjustment procedures for the SPT.

 SPT height value adjustment


 SPT-IRU position adjustment

9.4.1 SPT height value adjustment


Perform the SPT height value adjustment from the upper zero position. The value that
adjusted at factory shipment has been pre-configured. When replacing the SPT, the
value needs to be re-adjusted.

1. Dismount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

2. Remove the curettes (# 22, 24 and 25). Mount the RPT positioning jig at the #
22, MIX positioning jig at the #24, and the SPT positioning jig at the #25.

Figure 9.4-1

3. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

4. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

5. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

6. Dismount the ASP cover.

7. Put the ASP cover dummy jig into the shaft hole of the ASP interlock to release
the ASP interlock.

Figure 9.4-2

9-6
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

8. Move the SPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [07 SPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.
 Select [06 SPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9. Move the SPT downward.

 Select [07 SPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “220” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

10. Place the height adjustment jig against the MIX positioning jig and the RPT
positioning jig.

Figure 9.4-3

11. Place the height difference A (lower part) of the height adjustment jig under the
tip of the SPT pipette assembly.

 Check that the tip of the SPT pipette assembly is positioned at the range of the
height difference A. When it is not positioned, perform vertical position
adjustment of the SPT to position the tip of the pipette at the range of the
height difference A. When adjusting vertical position of the unit, the entered
pulse number becomes the pulse offset value. Record the moving pulse
number.

9-7
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.4-4

 Select [07 SPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter the designated
value at the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

 The SPTU moves 0.025mm per pulse.

When entering the pulse number, refer to the following chart.

Position Details Offset value


1 When the tip of the SPT pipette No adjustment needed. Offset value: 0
assembly positions at the 0.2mm
range of the height adjustment jig
2 When the tip of the SPT pipette Move down the tip of The entered pulse
assembly positions above the the SPT pipette number for moving
0.2mm range of the height assembly to position at down as a positive
adjustment jig the 0.2mm range of the offset value. The
height adjustment jig offset value: within
±40 in the pulse
range.
3 When the tip of the SPT pipette Move upward the tip of The entered pulse
assembly positions below the the SPT pipette number for moving
0.2mm range of the height assembly to position at upward as a
adjustment jig the 0.2mm range of the negative offset
height adjustment jig value. The offset
value: within ±40 in
the pulse range.

9-8
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

12. Refer to “10.3 Analyzer software update” and connect to analyzer software
using the [FFFTP].

13. Select the location: “/home/ca270/sysboot/system/” from drop-down menu at


the right side of the [FFFTP] screen.

Figure 9.4-5

14. Select the file: “mapoffset.txt” and click the “download” icon to save it on the
operational PC holder. After saving the file, double-click the “mapoffset.txt” file
from the operational PC holder.

Figure 9.4-6

15. Modify the value at the “+XX” of “SPTU_OFFSET +XX↑” as specified when
position adjusting. When modifying the value, carefully enter the value not to
change the numeric order in the text.

 The “+XX” part in the text has been entered the value that adjusted at the
factory shipment.

9-9
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.4-7

16. After modifying, save the “mapoffset.txt” file.

17. Select the modified “mapoffset.txt” file from the drop-down menu at the [FFFTP]
file and click the “Upload” icon to upload to “/home/ca270/sysboot/system”.

18. Select “Disconnect” from the “File” menu at the [FFFTP] screen and disconnect
the connection with the analyzer software.

19. Power the analyzer OFF and shut down the operational PC.

20. Dismount the height adjustment jig.

9-10
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.4.2 SPT-IRU position adjustment


1. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

2. Move the SPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [07: SPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execution” icon.
 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execution” icon.

3. Move the SPT downward to move the tip of the SPT pipette assembly towards
the SPT positioning jig.

 Select [07: SPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “300” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

4. Adjust the SPT position to fit the tip of the SPT pipette assembly in the convex
area of the center of the SPT positioning jig.

Figure 9.4-8

5. After adjusting the position, tighten the three screws (M4×10) that tentatively
fastened the SPT assembly.

6. Move the SPT to the zero position.

 Select [07 SPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9-11
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.5 ASP positioning adjustment


1. Install the ASP positioning jig (OU-CEN) at the ASP outer tray position # 16
(zero position) and ASP positioning jig (IN) at the ASP inner tray position # 48.

2. Move the ASP to the zero position.

 Select [12: ASP] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the “Execute”
icon.

3. Move the SPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [07: SPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click th e
“Execute” icon.
 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

4. Rotate the SPT to the aspiration position at the ASP outer layer.

 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor, [Move] at the Mode and [SPTRASPOUT] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

5. Adjust the ASP position to fit the tip of the SPT pipette assembly in the tip of the
ASP positioning jig (OU-CEN).

Figure 9.5-1

6. Rotate the ASP to the aspiration position at the ASP inner layer.

 Select [12: ASP] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [ASPIN] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

7. Rotate the SPT to the aspiration position at the ASP inner layer.

 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [SPTRASPIN] at
the Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

8. Adjust the ASP position to fit the tip of the SPT pipette assembly in the tip of the
ASP positioning jig (IN).

9. After position adjustment of the ASP trays (outer, midst, and inner layers),
tighten the four fixing screws (M4×10) that tentatively fasten the ASP.

9-12
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.6 Position adjustment of SPT trough


1. Move the SPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [07: SPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.
 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

2. Rotate the SPT to the wash position at the trough.

 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [SPTRTRD] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

3. Loosen the fixing screws and adjust the trough position to fit the tip of the SPT
pipette assembly at the center of the trough wash position.

Figure 9.6-1

Figure 9.6-2

4. Rotate the SPT to the drain position at the trough.

 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [SPTRDX] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

9-13
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

5. Move the tip of the SPT pipette assembly to the drain outlet of the trough.

 Select [07 SPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “1000” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

6. Adjust the trough position to fit the tip of the SPT pipette assembly at the center
of the trough drain outlet.

7. After position adjustment of the SPT pipette assembly at the trough, tighten the
fixing screws for the trough.

9-14
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.7 ISE position adjustment


1. Move the SPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [07: SPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.
 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

2. Rotate the SPT to the ISE sample port.

 Select [06: SPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [SPTRISE] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

3. Move the tip of the SPT pipette assembly 7mm towards the ISE sample port.

 Select [07: SPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “280” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

4. Adjust the ISE aspiration positions as indicated each position of the tip of the
SPT pipette assembly and the ISE sample port below. When adjusting, loosen
the two fixing screws (M3×8) for the ISE sample port.

Figure 9.7-1

5. Tighten the two fixing screws (M3×8) for the ISE sample port.

Figure 9.7-2

9-15
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

6. Power the analyzer OFF and shut down the operational PC.

7. Dismount the cuvette holder for the cuvette # 19 to 27 on the IRU and replace
the position adjustment jig with cuvettes.

8. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27 on the IRU.

9. Dismount the ASP positioning jigs (OU-CEN) and (IN).

10. Dismount the ASP cover dummy jig on the ASP.

9-16
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.8 RPT position adjustment


Here is described on the adjustment procedures for the RPT.

 RPT height value adjustment


 RPT-IRU position adjustment

9.8.1 RPT height value adjustment


Perform the RPT height value adjustment from the upper zero position. The value that
adjusted at factory shipment has been pre-configured. When replacing the RPT, the
value needs to be re-adjusted.

1. Dismount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

2. Dismount the cuvettes at the positions # 22, 24, and 25. Install the RPT
positioning jig at the position # 22 and the RPT positioning jig at the position #
24, and the SPT positioning jig at the position # 25.

Figure 9.8-1

3. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

4. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

5. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

6. Dismount the RCU cover.

7. Rotate the IRU.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor and [Pulse] at the Mode and enter “-5100” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

8. Move the RPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9-17
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9. Move the RPT downward.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “220” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

10. Place the height adjustment jig against the RPT positioning jig and the SPT
positioning jig.

Figure 9.8-2

11. Place the height difference A (lower part) of the height adjustment jig under the
tip of the RPT pipette assembly.

 Check that the tip of the pipette is positioned at the range of the height
difference A. When it is not positioned, perform vertical position adjustment of
the RPT to position the tip of the pipette at the range of the height difference A.
When adjusting vertical position of the unit, the entered pulse number
becomes the pulse offset value. Record the moving pulse number.

Figure 9.8-3

9-18
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter the designat ed
value at the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

 The RPTU moves 0.025mm per pulse.

When entering the pulse number, refer to the following table.


Position Details Modification for the
current offset values
1 When the tip of the RPT pipette No adjustment needed. Offset value: 0
assembly positions at the 0.2mm
range of the height adjustment
jig
2 When the tip of the RPT pipette Move down the tip of the The entered pulse
assembly positions above the RPT pipette assembly to number for moving down
0.2mm range of the height position at the 0.2mm as a positive offset value
adjustment jig range of the height for RPT.
adjustment jig The offset value: within
±40 in the pulse range.
3 When the tip of the RPT pipette Move upward the tip of The entered pulse
assembly positions below the the RPT pipette number for moving
0.2mm range of the height assembly to position at upward as a negative
adjustment jig the 0.2mm range of the offset value for RPT.
height adjustment jig The offset value: within
±40 in the pulse range.

9-19
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

12. Refer to “10.3 Analyzer software update” and connect to analyzer software
using the [FFFTP].

13. Select the location: “/home/ca270/sysboot/system/” from drop-down menu at


the right side of the [FFFTP] screen.

Figure 9.8-4

14. Select the file: “mapoffset.txt” and click the “download” icon to save it on the
operational PC holder. After saving the file, double-click the “mapoffset.txt” file
from the operational PC holder.

Figure 9.8-5

15. Modify the value at the “+XX” of “RPTU_OFFSET +XX” as specified when
position adjusting. When modifying the value, carefully enter the value not to
change the numeric order in the text.

 The “+XX” part in the text has been entered the value that adjusted at the
factory shipment.

9-20
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.8-6

16. After modifying, save the “mapoffset.txt” file.

17. Select the modified “mapoffset.txt” file from the drop-down menu at the left side
of the [FFFTP] and click the “Upload” icon to upload to
“/home/ca270/sysboot/system”.

18. Select “Disconnect” from the “File” menu at the [FFFTP] screen and disconnect
the connection with the analyzer software.

19. Power the analyzer OFF and shut down the operational PC.

20. Dismount the height adjustment jig.

9-21
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.8.2 RPT-IRU position adjustment


1. Power ON the analyzer and reboot the operational PC.

2. Move the RPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.
 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

3. Rotate the IRU.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor and [Pulse] at the Mode and enter “-5100” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

4. Move the RPT downward to move the tip of the RPT pipette assembly towards
the RPT positioning jig.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “300” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

5. Adjust the RPT position to fit the tip of the RPT pipette assembly at the convex
area of the center of the RPT positioning jig.

Figure 9.8-7

6. After adjusting the position, tighten the three screws (M4×10) that tentatively
fastened the RPT assembly.

7. Move the RPT to the zero position.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9-22
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.9 RCU position adjustment


1. Install a 20ml (round or square) bottle at the position # 26 of the reagent outer
tray and a 70ml reagent bottle at the position #1 of the reagent inner tray.

2. Move the RCU to the zero position.

 Select [13: RCU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

3. Move the RPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.
 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

4. Rotate the RPT to the RCU inner aspiration position.

 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [RPTRRCUIN] at
the Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

5. Move the RPT downward to move the tip of the RPT towards the opening of the
70ml reagent bottle.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “500” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

6. Adjust the RCU position to position the tip of the RPT pipette assembly at the
center of the opening of the 70ml reagent bottle of the position # 1.

Figure 9.9-1

7. Move the RPT to the zero position.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9-23
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

8. Rotate the RCU to the aspiration position at the RCU outer layer.

 Select [13: RCU] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [RCURGOUTRPT]
at the Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

9. Rotate the RPT to the RCU outer aspiration position.

 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [RPTRRCUOUT]
at the Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

10. Move the RPT downward to move the tip of the RPT pipette assembly towards
the RPT positioning jig.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “500” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

11. Adjust the RCU position to position the tip of the RPT pipette assembly at the
center of the opening of the 20ml reagent bottle of the position # 26.

Figure 9.9-2

12. After position adjustment of the RCU trays (outer and inner), tighten the four
fixing screws (M4×10) that tentatively fasten the RCU.

13. Move the RPT to the zero position.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9-24
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.10 Position adjustment of RPT trough


1. Move the RPT to the zero position (IRU).

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.
 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

2. Rotate the RPT to the wash position at the trough.

 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [RPTRTRD] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

3. Loosen the fixing screws and adjust the trough position to position the tip of the
RPT pipette assembly at the center of the trough wash position.

Figure 9.10-1

4. Rotate the RPT to the drain outlet at the trough.

 Select [04: RPTR] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [RPTRDX] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

5. Move the tip of the RPT pipette assembly to the drain outlet of the trough.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “1000” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

6. Loosen the fixing screws and adjust the trough position to position the tip of the
9-25
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

RPT pipette assembly at the center of the trough drain outlet.

7. After position adjustment of the RPT pipette assembly at the trough, tighten the
fixing screws for the trough.

8. Move the RPT pipette to the zero position.

 Select [05: RPTU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9. Power OFF the analyzer and shut down the operational PC.

10. Dismount the cuvette holder for the cuvette # 19 to 27 on the IRU and replace
the position adjustment jigs with cuvettes.

11. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

9-26
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.11 MIX1 height and position adjustment


Here is described on the adjustment procedures for the MIX1.

 MIX1 height value adjustment


 MIX1-IRU position adjustment

9.11.1 MIX1 height value adjustment

1. Dismount the MIX1 stirrer paddle.

 Prior to performing the MIX1 height adjustment, make sure to dismount the
stirrer paddle.

2. Dismount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

3. Remove the cuvettes (# 23, 25 and 26). Mount the RPT positioning jig at the
position # 23, SPT positioning jig at the position #25, and the MIX positioning jig
at the position #26.

Figure 9.11-1

4. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

5. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

6. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

7. Move the MIX1 to the IRU.

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor and [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “1188” at
the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

8. Place the height adjustment jig against the SPT positioning jig and the RPT
positioning jig.

9. Place the height difference B (higher part) of the height adjustment jig under the
convex part at the bottom of the mounting position of the MIX_K motor of the
MIX1 arm base.

9-27
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

 Move the MIX1 vertically and adjust to position the convex part at the bottom
of the mounting position of the MIX_K motor of the MIX1 arm base at the range
of the 0.3mm height difference B (higher part) of the height adjustment jig.
When adjusting vertical position of the unit, the actual moving height becomes
the pulse offset value. Record the moving height.

Figure 9.11-2

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter the designated
value at the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

When entering the pulse number, refer to the following table.


Position Details Offset value
1 When placing the convex No adjustment Offset value: 0
part at the bottom of the needed.
MIX1 arm base at the
0.3mm range of the height
adjustment jig.
2 When placing the convex Move the MIX1 down The pulse counts for
part at the bottom of the to the 0.3mm range moving down as a
MIX1 arm base above the of the height positive offset value.
0.3mm range of the height adjustment jig. The offset value: within
adjustment jig. ±20 in the pulse range.
3 When placing the convex Move the MIX1 The pulse counts for
part at the bottom of the upward to the 0.3mm moving upward as a
MIX1 arm base below the range of the height negative offset value
0.3mm range of the height adjustment jig. The offset value: within
adjustment jig. ±20 in the pulse range.

10. Refer to “10.3 Analyzer software update” and connect to analyzer software
using the [FFFTP].

11. Select the location: “/home/ca270/sysboot/system/” from drop-down menu at


the right side of the [FFFTP] screen.

9-28
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.11-3

12. Select the file: “mapoffset.txt” and click the “download” icon to save it on the
operational PC. After saving the file, double-click the “mapoffset.txt” file from the
operational PC holder.

Figure 9.11-4

13. Modify the value at the “+XX” of “MIX1U_OFFSET +XX” as specified when
position adjusting. When modifying the value, carefully enter the value not to
change the numeric order in the text.

 The “+XX” part in the text has been entered the value that adjusted at the
factory shipment.

Figure 9.11-5

9-29
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

14. After modifying, save the “mapoffset.txt” file.

15. Select the modified “mapoffset.txt” file from the drop-down menu at the left side
of the [FFFTP] and click the “Upload” icon to upload to
“/home/ca270/sysboot/system”.

16. Select “Disconnect” from the “File” menu at the [FFFTP] screen and disconnect
the connection with the analyzer software.

17. Power OFF the analyzer and shut down the operational PC.

18. Dismount the height adjustment jig.

19. Mount the stirrer paddle.

9.11.2 MIX1-IRU position adjustment

1. Power ON the analyzer and reboot the operational PC.

2. Move the MIX1 to the zero position.

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

3. Move the MIX1 to the IRU.

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “880” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

4. Adjust the MIX1 position to position the MIX1 stirrer paddle at the center of the
MIX positioning jig.

Figure 9.11-6

5. After adjusting the position, tighten the three screws (M4×10) that tentatively
fastened the MIX1.

9-30
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

6. Move the MIX1 to the zero position.

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

7. Dismount the cuvette holder for the cuvette # 19 to 27 on the IRU and replace
the position adjustment jig with cuvettes.

8. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

9-31
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.12 MIX1 trough position adjustment


1. Move the MIX1 to the zero position.

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

2. Loosen the two fixing screws (M3×8) for the trough and adjust the MIX1 trough
position to position the stirrer paddle at the center of the trough wash position.

Figure 9.12-1

3. After position adjusting, tighten the two fixing screws (M3×8) for the MIX trough.

9-32
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.13 MIX2 height and position adjustment


Here is described on the adjustment procedures for the MIX2.

 MIX2 height value adjustment


 MIX2-IRU position adjustment

9.13.1 MIX2 height value adjustment

1. Dismount the MIX2 stirrer paddle.

 Prior to performing the MIX2 height adjustment, make sure to dismount the
stirrer paddle.

2. Dismount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

3. Remove the cuvettes (# 23, 25 and 26). Mount the RPT positioning jig at the
position # 23, SPT positioning jig at the position #25, and the MIX positioning jig
at the position #26.

Figure 9.13-1

4. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

5. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

6. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

7. Rotate the IRU counterclockwise.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “-5200” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

8. Move the MIX2 to the IRU.

 Select [00: MIX1U] at the Motor and [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “1188” at
the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

9. Place the height adjustment jig against the SPT positioning jig and the RPT
positioning jig.

9-33
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

10. Place the height difference B (higher part) of the height adjustment jig under the
convex part at the bottom of the mounting position of the MIX_K motor of the
MIX2 arm base.

 Move the MIX2 vertically and adjust to position the convex part at the bottom
of mounting position of the MIX_K motor of the MIX2 arm base at the range of
the 0.3mm height difference B (higher part) of the height adjustment jig. When
adjusting vertical position of the unit, the actual moving height becomes the
pulse offset value. Record the numerical value of the moving height.

Figure 9.13-2

 Select [01: MIX2U] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter the designated
value at the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

When entering the pulse number, refer to the following table.


Position Details Offset value
1 When placing the convex part No adjustment needed. Offset value: 0
at the bottom of the MIX2 arm
base at the 0.3mm range of
the height adjustment jig.
2 When placing the convex part Move the MIX2 down to The pulse counts for
at the bottom of the MIX2 arm the 0.3mm range of moving down as a
base above the 0.3mm range the height adjustment positive offset value.
of the height adjustment jig. jig. The offset value: within
±20 in the pulse range.
3 When placing the convex part Move the MIX2 upward The entered pulse
at the bottom of the MIX2 arm to the 0.3mm range of number for moving
base below the 0.3mm range the height adjustment upward as a negative
of the height adjustment jig. jig. offset value.
The offset value: within
±20 in the pulse range.

9-34
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

11. Refer to “10.3 Analyzer software update” and connect to analyzer software
using the [FFFTP].

12. Select the location: “/home/ca270/sysboot/system/” from drop-down menu at


the right side of the [FFFTP] screen.

Figure 9.13-3

13. Select the file: “mapoffset.txt” and click the “download” icon to save it on the
operational PC holder. After saving the file, double-click the “mapoffset.txt” file
from the operational PC holder.

Figure 9.13-4

14. Modify the value at the “+XX” of “MIX2U_OFFSET +XX” as specified when
position adjusting. When modifying the value, carefully enter the value not to
change the numeric order in the text.

 The “+XX” part in the text has been entered the value that adjusted at the
factory shipment.

9-35
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.13-5

15. After modifying, save the “mapoffset.txt” file.

16. Select the modified “mapoffset.txt” file from the drop-down menu at the left side
of the [FFFTP] and click the “Upload” icon to upload to
“/home/ca270/sysboot/system”.

17. Select “Disconnect” from the “File” menu at the [FFFTP] screen and disconnect
the connection with the analyzer software.

18. Power OFF the analyzer and the operational PC.

19. Dismount the height adjustment jig.

20. Mount the stirrer paddle.

9.13.2 MIX2-IRU position adjustment

1. Power ON the analyzer and reboot the operational PC.

2. Move the MIX2 to the zero position.

 Select [01: MIX2U] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

3. Move the IRU to the zero position.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the “Execute”
icon.

4. Rotate the IRU counterclockwise.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “-4800” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon

5. Move the MIX2 to the IRU.

 Select [01: MIX2U] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “880” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

6. Adjust the MIX2 position to position the MIX2 stirrer paddle at the center of the
MIX positioning jig.

9-36
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.13-6

7. After adjusting the position, tighten the three screws (M4×10) that tentativ ely
fastened the MIX2 assembly.

8. Move the MIX2 to the zero position.

 Select [01: MIX2U] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the
“Execute” icon.

9. Dismount the cuvette holder for the cuvette # 19 to 27 on the IRU and replace
the position adjustment jig with cuvettes.

10. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 19 to 27.

9-37
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.14 MIX2 trough position adjustment


1. Mount the stirrer paddle and move the MIX2 towards the trough position by
hand.

2. Loosen the two fixing screws (M3×8) for the trough and adjust the MIX2 trough
position to position the stirrer paddle at the center of the trough wash position.

Figure 9.14-1

3. After position adjusting, tighten the two fixing screws (M3×8) for the MIX2
trough.

9-38
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.15 Adjustment for WU height and WU-IRU position


Here is described on the adjustment procedures for the WU.

 WU height value adjustment


 WU-IRU position adjustment

9.15.1 WU height value adjustment

1. Rotate the IRU.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor and [Pulse] at the Mode and enter “2500” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

2. Dismount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 37 to 45 on the IRU. Remove the
cuvettes (# 37, 43 and 45).

3. Mount the WU positioning jigs at the cuvette # 37 and # 43. Mount each of the
jigs placing the WU side up. Position the hole of each jig at the center of the
IRU.

4. Mount the MIX positioning jig at the cuvette # 45. Mount the cuvette holder for
the cuvette # 37 to # 45.

Figure 9.15-1

5. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

6. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

7. Rotate the IRU counterclockwise.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “-200” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

8. Move the WU downward.

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “50” at the Pulse
Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

9. Place the height adjustment jig against the positioning jig.

9-39
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

10. Place the height difference A (lower part) of the height adjustment jig under the
tip of the WU nozzle.

 Move the WU vertically and adjust to position the tip of the WU1 nozzle at the
range of the 0.2mm height difference (lower part) of the height adjustment jig
as shown below. When adjusting vertical position of the unit, the actual moving
height becomes the pulse offset value. Record the numerical value of the
moving height.

Figure 9.15-2

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter the designated
value at the Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

 The WU moves 0.02mm per pulse.

When entering the pulse number, refer to the following table.


Position Details Offset value
1 When the tip of the WU1 nozzle No adjustment Offset value: 0
positions at the 0.2mm range needed.
of the height adjustment jig.
2 When the tip of the WU1 nozzle Move the WU nozzle The pulse counts for
positions above the 0.2mm downward by 2 pulses moving down as a
range of the height adjustment until the tip of the WU1 positive offset value.
jig. nozzle positions at the The offset value:
0.2mm range of the within ±50 in the
height adjustment jig. pulse range.
3 When the tip of the WU1 nozzle Move the WU1 nozzle The pulse counts for
positions below the 0.2mm upward by 2 pulses moving upward as a
range of the height adjustment until the tip of the negative offset value.
jig. nozzle positions at the The offset value:
0.2mm range of the within ±50 in the
height adjustment jig. pulse range.

9-40
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

11. Refer to “10.3 Analyzer software update” and connect to analyzer software
using the [FFFTP].

12. Select the location: “/home/ca270/sysboot/system/” from drop-down menu at


the right side of the [FFFTP] screen.

Figure 9.15-3

13. Select the file: “mapoffset.txt” and click the “download” icon to save it on the
operational PC holder. After saving the file, double-click the “mapoffset.txt” file
from the operational PC holder.

Figure 9.15-4

14. Modify the value at the “+XX” of “WU_OFFSET +XX” as specified when
position adjusting. When modifying the value, carefully enter the value not to
change the numeric order in the text.

 The “+XX” part in the text has been entered the value that adjusted at the
factory shipment.

9-41
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.15-5

15. After modifying, save the “mapoffset.txt” file.

16. Select the modified “mapoffset.txt” file from the drop-down menu at the left side
of the [FFFTP] and click the “Upload” icon to upload to
“/home/ca270/sysboot/system”.

17. Select “Disconnect” from the “File” menu at the [FFFTP] screen and disconnect
the connection with the analyzer software.

18. Power OFF the analyzer and the operational PC.

19. Dismount the height adjustment jig.

9.15.2 WU-IRU position adjustment

1. Power ON the analyzer and reboot the operational PC.

2. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

3. Rotate the IRU counterclockwise.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “-100” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

4. Move the WU downward.

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “150” at the Pulse
Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

5. Adjust to position each tip of the WU1 supply nozzle and the WU4 supply nozzle
at the hole of the WU positioning jig. Tighten the two fixing screws (M4×10) to fix
the WU.

9-42
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

Figure 9.15-6

6. Move the WU upward.

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor, [Search] at the Mode, and click the “Execute”
icon.

7. Rotate the IRU counterclockwise.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “-4500” at the
Pulse Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

8. Dismount the cuvette holder for the cuvette # 37 to 45 on the IRU and replace
the position adjustment jig with cuvettes.

9. Mount the cuvette holder for cuvette # 37 to 45.

9-43
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.15.3 Wipe tip position adjustment

1. Move the WU to the zero position of the IRU.

 Select [09: IRU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the “Execute”
icon.

2. Loosen the two fixing screws (M3×8) fixing the Wipe base.

Figure 9.15-7

3. Move the WU to the zero position.

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the “Execute”
icon.

4. Move the WU downward and check the position between the wipe tip and
cuvette.

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor, [Pulse] at the Mode, and enter “400” at the Pulse
Number. Click the “Execute” icon.

5. Adjust the wipe tip position including its angle by moving the wipe base to
position the wipe tip at the center from each side of the cuvette.

9-44
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

 Adjust the wipe tip position at the even clearances (A and A", and B and B”)
between cuvette and the wipe tip by rotating it.

Figure 9.15-8

6. Move the WU to the zero position.

7. Select [08: WU] at the Motor and [Search] at the Mode and click the “Execute”
icon.

8. Move the WU to the bottom of the cuvette.

 Select [08: WU] at the Motor and [Move] at the Mode, and [WUUDL] at the
Position. Click the “Execute” icon.

9. Check that there is approx. 1mm clearance between the wipe holder and the
wipe base. When the clearance is not appropriate (wider or smaller), loosen the
fixing screw (M3×5) and adjust the height of the wipe holder to make the 1mm
(approx.) clearance.

Figure 9.15-9

9-45
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.16 IRU cuvette table position adjustment


1. Temporarily fix the cuvette table assembly by the four screws (M3×10).

Figure 9.16-1

2. Power the analyzer ON and reboot the operational PC.

3. Click the [Initialization] button in the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.
Perform initialization.

4. Insert the IRU table adjuster into the hole for position adjustment.

Figure 9.16-2

9-46
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

5. Fix the IRU table adjuster by tightening the screw (M3×12).

 Insert the IRU table adjuster into the cuvette table to the bottom and tighten
the screw.

Figure 9.16-3

6. Fix the cuvette table assembly by tightening the four screws (M3×10).

Figure 9.16-4

7. Remove the screw (M3×12) and dismount the IRU table adjuster.

9-47
Chapter 9: Position adjustment of unit

9.17 End procedure after adjustment


Perform the following procedure after the position adjustment of the unit.

1. Power the analyzer OFF and shut down the operational PC.

2. Tighten the fixing screws of the unit after adjustment.

3. Mount all the mosaic covers to the original positions. For the procedure, refer to
“8.1.1. Replacement of covers (CVR).”

9-48
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Chapter 10 Software setup and update

 Administrative right is required for the software installation.

10.1 Preparatory setup (in Windows XP)


Perform preparatory setup before software update.
The setup you have once established here is stored even after shutting down the
operational PC.

10.1.1 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Setup

1. Click [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel] and display the “Control Panel”
window.

2. Click the “Network and Internet Connections” icon to display the “Network and
Internet Connections” window.

Figure 10.1-1

10-1
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

3. Click the “Network Connections” icon to display the “Network Connections”


window.

Figure 10.1-2

4. Right-click the “Local Area Connection” icon. Click the [Properties].

Figure 10.1-3

10-2
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

5. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” in the [General] tab. Click the [Properties].

Figure 10.1-4

6. Tick "Use the following IP address:”. Specify the following IP address and click
the [OK] button.

Figure 10.1-5

7. Click the [X] button to close the window. The setup is completed.

10-3
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.1.2 Security setting (Firewall settings off)

1. Click [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel] and display the “Control Panel”
window.

2. Click the [Security] > [Security Center] > [Windows Firewall] and display the
“Windows Firewall” window.

Figure 10.1-6

3. Select [General] tab and tick “Off (not recommended).”. Click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.1-7

10-4
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.1.3 Security setting (Automatic updating off)

1. Click [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel] and display the “Control Panel”
window.

2. Click the [Security Center] > [Automatic updates] and display the “Automatic
updates” window.

Figure 10.1-8

3. Select [Automatic updates] tab and tick “Turn off Automatic Updates”. Click the
[OK] button.

Figure 10.1-9

10-5
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.1.4 Screen setting

1. Click [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel] and display the “Control Panel”
window.

2. Click the [Appearance and Themes] > [Display] and display the “Display
Properties” window.

Figure 10.1-10

3. Select the [Screen saver] tab.


(a) Screen saver: None

Figure 10.1-11

4. Click the [Power…] button and display “Power Options Properties” window.

Figure 10.1-12

10-6
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

(a) Select the [Power Schemes] tab.


Turn off the monitor: Never
Turn off hard disks: After 1 hour

Figure 10.1-13

(b) Select the [Advanced] tab.


Options
□ always show icon on the taskbar: (no check)

Power buttons
□ when I press the power button on my computer: Do nothing

Figure 10.1-14

10-7
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

5. Select the [Settings] tab.


(a) Screen resolution: 1280 × 1024 pixels
(b) Color quality: High (32 bit)

Figure 10.1-15

6. Click the [OK] button.

10-8
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.1.5 Regional setting


In multilingual version Windows XP, regional setting is required.
Note: some regions may not be covered depending on software.
Country Standards and Location Language for Decimal
formats non-Unicode symbol
programs
France (FRA) French France French .
Germany (DEU) German Germany German .
Spain (ESN) Spanish Spain Spanish .
Chinese (CHS) Chinese China Chinese .
Russia (RUS) Russian Russia Russian .
United States English United States of English .
(ENU) America
Japan (JPN) Japanese Japan Japanese .
Portugal (PTG) Portuguese Portugal Portuguese .
Italy (ITA) Italian Italy Italian .
Norway (NOR) Norwegian Norway Norwegian .
Sweden (SVE) Swedish Sweden Swedish
Greece (ELL) Greek Greece Greek .
Poland (PLK) Polish Poland Polish .

1. Click [Start] >[Settings] > [Control Panel] and the “Date, Time, Language, and
Regional Options” icon. Click “Regional Language Options” icon and display the
window.

Figure 10.1-16

2. Select the [Regional Options] tab and specify "Standards and formats”.
(a) Select the item to use the language (country) from drop-down menu.

10-9
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.1-17

3. Click the [Customize…] button and display the “Customize Regional Options”
window.

Figure 10.1-18

(a) Select the [Date] tab.


Short date format: yy/MM/dd
Date separator: /
Long date format: yy/MM/dd
(b) Select the [Time] tab.
Time format: HH:mm:ss
(c) Click the [OK] button.

10-10
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.1-19

4. Select the [Regional Options] tab and specify "Location”.


(a) Select the country name from drop-down menu.

Figure 10.1-20

5. Select the [Languages] tab and specify "Text services and input languages”.
(a) Click the [Details…] button and display “Text services and input
languages” window.
(b) Select the country name in “Default input language” from drop-down
menu.
(c) When the country name not displayed in the drop-down menu, click the
[Add] button to add the name.
(d) Click the [OK] button.

10-11
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.1-21

6. Click the [OK] button.

10.1.6 Printer setting


Follow the printer setting as described in its operator ’s manual since the installation
varies depending on the printer type.

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Printers and Other Hardware] and display the
“Printers and faxes” window.

Figure 10.1-22

2. Select and right-click the printer icon and display the “Printer Properties”
window.

3. Select the [Advanced] tab.


● Spool the document to be printed to process program printing at high-speed.
○ Spool data for all pages and send it as print data to printer: (remove the
checkmark.)
10-12
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

● Send print data to printer immediately.

Figure 10.1-23

4. Click the [OK] button.

5. Perform printing test.

10-13
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.1.7 Setting for Hyper Terminal

1. Click [Start] > [Programs] > [Accessories] > [Communications] > [Hyper
Terminal].

Figure 10.1-24

2. Click the [Yes] button when the following dialog is displayed.


When not displaying the pop-up message, follow the step 5 for setting.

Figure 10.1-25

10-14
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

3. The “location information” window appears. Enter the following information and
click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.1-26

4. The “Phone and Modem Options” window appears. Confirm that [My Location] is
ticked. Click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.1-27

10-15
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

5. The “Connection Description” window appears. Enter IP address


(172.17.31.202) at the Name:. Click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.1-28

6. The following window appears. Select “TCP/IP(Winsock)” at the Connection


using: from drop-down menu.

Figure 10.1-29

7. Enter IP address (172.17.31.202) at the Host address:. Click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.1-30

10-16
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

8. After the setting completed, the communication between the operational PC and
the analyzer will be established. Activate the [Hyper Terminal] and log in the
analyzer. All programs are ready for execution.

Figure 10.1-31

9. To terminate the [Hyper Terminal], click the “Disconnect” icon from menu bar.

Figure 10.1-32

10. Create a shortcut for [Hyper Terminal] in the following procedure.


(a) Click [Start] > [Programs] > [Accessories] > [Communications] > [Hyper
Terminal] > [171.17.31.202ht].
(b) Right-click the [171.17.31.202.ht] and click [Create Shortcut].
(c) Place the created shortcut on desktop by drag-and-drop.

10-17
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.1.8 FFFTP setting

1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button to shut down the operational software.

2. Double-click the “FFFTP” icon on desktop to activate [FFFTP].

Figure 10.1-33

Figure 10.1-34

3. Specify the connection with [Biolyzer 300] in the following procedure.


(a) Click the [New Host…] button.

Figure 10.1-35

(b) Select the [General] tab and specify the following.


Profile Name: ca270
Host Name/Address: 172.17.31.202
Username: ca270
Initial Local Folder: C:¥
Initial Host Folder: ¥home¥ca270

10-18
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.1-36

(c) Select the [Advanced] tab and specify the following.


Port: 21
Host Timezone: GMT+9:00 (Japan)
Security: Auto

Figure 10.1-37

(d) Select the [Kanji Code] tab and specify the following.
Japanese Kanji Code: No conversion [S-JIS]
Filename Kanji Code: SHIFT-JIS

10-19
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.1-38

(e) Select the [Dialup] tab and specify the following.

Figure 10.1-39

(f) Select the [Special] tab and specify the following.

Figure 10.1-40

(g) Click the [OK] button. The setting is completed.

10-20
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2 Preparatory setup (in Windows Vista)


10.2.1 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Setup

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Network and Sharing Center].

2. Click [Manage network connections] > “Local Area Connection” icon. Right-click
the "Local Area Connection” icon and select “Properties”.

Figure 10.2-1

3. Tick “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/Ipv4) and click the [Properties] button in
the [Networking] tab.

4. Tick “Use the following IP address" in the [General] tab and enter the following
information.
IP address: 172.17.31.201
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0.
Default gateway: (blank)

Figure 10.2-2

5. Click the [OK] button.


10-21
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.2 Security setting (Firewall settings off)

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Security Center].

Figure 10.2-3

2. Click the [Windows Firewall] and display the “Windows Firewall” window.

3. Click the [Change Settings] and display the “Windows Firewall Settings”
window.

Figure 10.2-4

4. Select [General] tab and tick “Off (not recommended)”. Click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.2-5

10-22
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.3 Security setting (Automatic updating off)

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Security Center].

2. Click “Windows update” and display the “Windows Security Center” window.

3. Click “Automatic updating” and “Check for updates” and display the “Change
settings” window.

Figure 10.2-6

4. Tick “Never check for update (not recommended)”. Click the [OK] button.

Figure 10.2-7

10-23
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.4 Security setting (Malware protection off)

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Security Center].

2. Click “Windows update” and display the “Windows Security Center” window.

3. Click [Malware protection] > [Show my available protections] and display the
“Windows Security Center” window.

Figure 10.2-8

4. Tick “Don’t monitor my antivirus software state (not recommended)”. Click the
[OK] button.

Figure 10.2-9

10-24
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.5 Screen setting

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Personalization].

2. Click the [Screen saver] and display the “Screen Saver Settings” window.

Figure 10.2-10

3. Specify the settings in the [Screen Saver] tab.


(a) Screen saver: (None)

Figure 10.2-11

(b) Click the [OK] button.

10-25
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

4. Click the [Change power setting…] and display “Power Options” window.

Figure 10.2-12

5. Click the [Change plan settings] at the Preferred plans and display the “Change
settings for the plan: Balanced” window.

Figure 10.2-13

6. Specify the setting in the “Change settings for the plan: Balanced” window.
(a) Turn off the display : Never
(b) Put the computer to sleep: Never

10-26
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.2-14

(c) Click the [Save changes] button.

7. Click the [Change advanced power settings] and display "Power Options”
window.

Figure 10.2-15

8. Specify the setting in the [Advanced settings] tab.


(a) Turn off hard disks After: 60 Minutes
(b) Hibernate after: Never
(c) Require a password on wakeup: Never
(d) Power button action: Do nothing

Figure 10.2-16

10-27
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

9. Click the [Personalization] > [Display Settings].

Figure 10.2-17

10. Specify the setting in the [Monitor] tab.


(a) Screen resolution: 1280 × 1024 pixels
(b) Color quality: High (32 bit)

Figure 10.2-18

11. Click the [Apply] button and then [OK] button.

10-28
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.6 Regional setting


In multilingual version Windows Vista, regional setting is required.
Note: some regions may not be covered depending on software.
Country Standards and Location Language for Decimal
formats non-Unicode symbol
programs
France (FRA) French France French .
Germany (DEU) German Germany German .
Spain (ESN) Spanish Spain Spanish .
Chinese (CHS) Chinese China Chinese .
Russia (RUS) Russian Russia Russian .
United States English United States of English .
(ENU) America
Japan (JPN) Japanese Japan Japanese .
Portugal (PTG) Portuguese Portugal Portuguese .
Italy (ITA) Italian Italy Italian .
Norway (NOR) Norwegian Norway Norwegian .
Sweden (SVE) Swedish Sweden Swedish
Greece (ELL) Greek Greece Greek .
Poland (PLK) Polish Poland Polish .

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Regional and Language Options].

2. Select the [Formats] tab in the “Regional and Language Options” window.
(a) Select the country name from drop-down menu.

Figure 10.2-19

10-29
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

3. Click the [Customize this format…] button and display the “Customize Regional
Options” window.

Figure 10.2-20

(a) Specify in the [Numbers] tab and click the [Apply] button.
Decimal symbol: “.”

Figure 10.2-21

(b) Specify in the [Time] tab and click [Apply] button.


Time format: H.mm.ss
AM symbol: AM
PM symbol: PM

10-30
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.2-22

(c) Specify in the [Date] tab and click the [Apply] button.
Short date: yy/MM/dd
Long date: yy/MM/dd

Figure 10.2-23

4. Select the [Location] tab in the “Regional and Language Options” window.
(a) Select the country name from drop-down menu.

Figure 10.2-24

10-31
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

5. Select the [Keyboards and Languages] tab in the “Regional and Language
Options” window.
(a) Click the [Change keyboards…] button and display the “Text Services and
Input Languages" window.

Figure 10.2-25

(b) Select the country name from drop-down menu.


(c) When not found in the country name list, add the name.

Figure 10.2-26

(d) Click the [OK] button.

6. Select the [Administrative] tab in the “Regional and Language Options” window.
(a) Click the [Change system locale…] button and display the "Regional and
Language Options" window.

10-32
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.2-27

(b) Select the “Current system locale” from drop-down menu.

Figure 10.2-28

(c) Click the [OK] button.

7. Click the [OK] button.

10-33
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.7 Windows setting

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Personalization].

Figure 10.2-29

2. Click the [Personalization] and display “Theme settings” window.

3. Select “Windows Classic” at the Active Window in the [Theme] tab.

Figure 10.2-30

4. Click the [Apply] button.

10-34
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.8 Daylight saving time setting

 Daylight saving time is utilized depending on the countries and regions. Tick
the “Automatically adjust clock for Daylight Saving time” for adopting when it
appears in the setting window.

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Date and Time].

Figure 10.2-31

2. Click the [Change time zone…] button in the [Date and Time] tab and display the
“Time zone settings” window.

Figure 10.2-32

3. Select the “Time zone” from drop-down menu.


Tick “Automatically adjust clock for Daylight Saving time”.

Figure 10.2-33

4. Click the [OK] button.


10-35
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.9 Printer setting


Follow the printer setting as described in its operator ’s manual since the installation
procedure varies depending on the printer type.

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Printers].

2. Select and right-click the “Printers” icon and display the “Printer Properties”
window.

3. Select the [Advanced] tab.


● Spool the document to be printed to process program printing at high-speed.
○ Spool data for all pages and send it as print data to printer: (remove the
checkmark.)
● Send print data to printer immediately.

Figure 10.2-34

4. Click the [OK] button.

5. Perform printing test.

10-36
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.10 Telnet connection setting

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Programs and features] and display “Program
and functions" window.

2. Click the [Turn Windows features on or off] and display the “Windows features”
window.

Figure 10.2-35

3. Tick the “Telnet Client”.

Figure 10.2-36

4. Click the [OK] button.

5. Activate the command prompt and enter the following information.


C:¥Users¥furuno>telnet 172.17.31.202 (and press the [Enter] key.)
login: ca270 (and press the [Enter] key.)
password: qnx (and press the [Enter] key.)

10-37
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.2-37

6. To terminate this session, click the [X] button at the upper-right corner.

10-38
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.2.11 FFFTP setting

1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button to shut down the operational software.

2. Double-click the “FFFTP” icon on desktop to activate [FFFTP].

Figure 10.2-38

3. Specify the connection with [Biolyzer 300] in the following procedure.


(a) Click the [New Host] button to display “ca270” in the Host List.

Figure 10.2-39

(b) Select the [General] tab and specify the following.


Profile Name: ca270
Host Name/Address: 172.17.31.202
Username: ca270
Password/Phrase: qnx
Initial Local Folder: C:¥
Initial Host Folder: ¥home¥ca270

Figure 10.2-40

10-39
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

(c) Select the [Advanced] tab and specify the following.


Port: 21
Host Timezone: GMT+9:00 (Japan)
Security: Auto

Figure 10.2-41

(d) Select the [Kanji Code] tab and specify the following.
Japanese Kanji Code: No conversion [S-JIS]
Filename Kanji Code: SHIFT-JIS

Figure 10.2-42

(e) Select the [Dialup] tab and specify the following.

10-40
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.2-43

(f) Select the [Special] tab and specify the following.


Tick “Use NLST-R for high-speed recursive search”.
Permissions Change Command: SITE CHMOD
Host Type: Auto
NLST Filename/Option: -aL

Figure 10.2-44

(g) Click the [OK] button. The setting is completed.

10-41
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.3 Analyzer software update


1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button to shut down the operational software.

2. Double click the “FFFTP” icon on desktop to activate [FFFTP].

Figure 10.3-1

3. Select “ca270” in the “Host List” window. Click the [Connect] button.

4. [FFFTP] becomes activated. The following window appears. It indicates the


contents [C:] in the operational PC at the left side of the screen and
[/home/CA270] in the analyzer software at the right side.

Figure 10.3-2

5. Double-click the [update] folder at the right side of the screen and display the
[/home/CA270/update] contents.

6. Double click the folder that contains the analyzer update software at the left side
and display them.

7. Select the analyzer update software (CA270.tar.F) and click the "Upload" icon
on the tool bar. The data (CA270.tar) is transferred to the [update] folder in t he
analyzer software.

8. Double-click the shortcut icon for “172.17.31.202ht” on desktop and activate


“Hyper Terminal”.
10-42
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

Figure 10.3-3

9. When [Login:_] appears, enter “ca270”.

10. When [password:_] appears, enter “qnx”.

 The entered information on the [password:_] is not appeared.

11. When [ca270>_] appears, enter “cd update”.

12. When [ca270>_] appears again, enter “ca270_update”.

Figure 10.3-4

13. The data in the analyzer software is automatically updated. Wait until the
processing completed.

14. When “ca270>_" appears after the update completed, enter “logout” to
terminate [Hyper Terminal].

10-43
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.4 User-interface software update


A. System Parameters Backup

1. Select [System (F9] > [Backup Procedures]. Click the […] button on the
“Directory” for system parameters backup.

2. Click the [Save] button.

B. User-interface software termination

1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button to shut down the operational software.

C. Deletion of the current (before update) operational software

1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] in Windows XP to display the “Control Panel”
window.

2. Click [Add or Remove Programs] and select [Analyzer]. Click the [Remove]
button.

3. The [Analyzer-InstallAware Wizard] window appears. Click the [Next>] button to


execute the deletion.

4. After completing the deletion, the [Analyzer-InstallAware Wizard] window


automatically disappears.

D. Installation of new operational software

1. Save the update program [ca_setup.exe] on desktop from the external memory
medium (such as USB memory).

2. Double-click the “ca_setup.exe" icon. The [InstallAware Wizard] window


appears.

3. Click the [Next>] button. The installation automatically starts.

4. After installation, the following window appears to restart the operational PC.
Click the [Yes] button. Click [Start] > [Turn Off Computer…] > [Restart].

5. Restart the operational PC. Double-click the shortcut "CAMAIN" and start the
operational software.

E. Load the system parameters.

1. Select [System (F9] > [Backup Procedures]. Click the […] button on the
“Directory” for system parameters backup.

2. Click the [Load] button to load the system parameters.

10-44
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

3. Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. Click the [Power Off] button and terminate
the operational software.

4. Double click the shortcut "CAMAIN" and restart the operational software.

F. Final Confirmation

1. Select [System (F9)] > [Versions]. Check the version number of the "User
interface” is updated.

2. Select [System (F9)] > [Sequence]. Click the [Initialization] button and check the
initialization is performed properly.

10-45
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

10.5 Changing correction parameters


A. Changing temperature and quantitative parameter

1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button and shut down the operational software.

2. Double click the “FFFTP” icon on desktop to activate [FFFTP].

Figure 10.5-1

3. Select “ca270” in the “Host List” window. Click the [Connect] button.

4. Open the [/home/ca270/sysboot/system] folder at the “FFFTP” window (right


side of screen). Select the “system.txt”.

5. Click the “download” icon from the toolbar and save the “sytem.txt” file into c:
drive in the operational PC.

Figure 10.5-2

6. Use text editor software (such as Notepad) to open the “system.txt” file. Modify
and save the file.

 Contact our service division when modifying the “system.txt”.

7. Select the modified “system. txt” at the “FFFTP” window (left side of screen).

8. Click the “upload” icon from the toolbar and save the modified “sytem.txt” file
into the [/home/ca270/sysboot/system] folder in the operational software.

Figure 10.5-3

9. Double-click the modified “system. txt” uploaded in the “FFFTP” window (left
side of screen) and check that the file is the modified version. After confirmatio n,
10-46
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

click the [X] button on the “FFFTP” window and exit the [FFFTP].

B. Changing Position Map (mapoffset.txt)

 After replacing or repairing the SPT, the RPT, the MIX1, the MIX2, or the WU,
the offset file needs to be updated only when adjustment for the height
direction is required.

1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button and shut down the operational software.

2. Double click the “FFFTP” icon on desktop to activate [FFFTP].

Figure 10.5-4

3. Select “ca270” in the “Host List” window. Click the [Connect] button.

4. Open the [/home/ca270/sysboot/pmap] folder at the “FFFTP” window (right side


of screen). Select the file to be modified.

5. Click the “download” icon from the toolbar and save the file into c: drive in the
operational PC.

Figure 10.5-5

6. Use text editor software (such as Notepad) to open the file. Modify and save the
file.

 Contact our service division when needs to modify the file.

7. Select the modified file at the “FFFTP” window (left side of screen).

8. Click the “upload” icon from the toolbar and save the modified file into the
[/home/ca270/sysboot/pmap] folder in the operational software.

9. Double-click the uploaded file in the “FFFTP” window (left side of screen) and
check that the file is the modified version. After confirmation, click the [X] button
on the “FFFTP” window and exit the [FFFTP].

10-47
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

C. Changing option setting file

 Option setting files


File Description
ayomu.txt For applying Sample barcode reader
cuvette.txt For selecting cuvette type (resin or glass)
dakki.txt For applying Degassing unit
denkai.txt For applying ISE unit
gaibu.txt For applying External tank sensors
siyakuobiyomi.txt For applying Reagent barcode reader
tumari.txt For applying Clot detection sensor

1. Terminate all programs running in the operational PC. Terminate the operational
software in the following procedure.
(a) Press and hold the [Ctrl] and [.] keys. The following message appears.
(b) Click the [Power Off] button and shut down the operational software.

2. Double click the “FFFTP” icon on desktop to activate [FFFTP].

Figure 10.5-6

3. Select “ca270” in the “Host List” window. Click the [Connect] button.

4. Open the [/home/ca270/sysboot/kokyaku] folder at the “FFFTP” window (right


side of screen). Select the file to be modified.

5. Click the “download” icon from the toolbar and save the file into c: drive in the
operational PC.

Figure 10.5-7

6. Use text editor software (such as Notepad) to open the file. Modify and save the
file.

 Contact our service division when needs to modify the file.

7. Select the modified file at the “FFFTP” window (left side of screen).

10-48
Chapter 10: Software setup and update

8. Click the “upload” icon from the toolbar and save the modified file into the
[/home/ca270/sysboot/kokyaku] folder in the operational software.

Figure 10.5-8

9. Double-click the uploaded file in the “FFFTP” window (left side of screen) and
check that the file is the modified version. After confirmation, click the [X] button
on the “FFFTP” window and exit the [FFFTP].

10-49
Chapter 11: Specification

Chapter 11 Specification

11.1 Technical Specification


1 Name of device Fully Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer Biolyzer 300

2 Usage General chemistry as photometric assay

Immunology as photometric assay (Latex reagent available)


3 Assay type 1 point end, 2 point end, 1 point rate, and 2 point rate

4 Type of calibration Factor, Linear, Point to point, Log-logit, Exponential, Spline, and Spline 2

5 Throughput 270 tests per hour

6 Incubation time Reagent 1 assay: 10 minutes (R1)

Reagent 2 assay: 5 minutes (R1) + 5 minutes (R2)

(Reagent 1 and regent 2 assays can be set at the same time)

7 Sample type Serum, Plasma, and Urine

8 Number of simultaneous 50 methods (Max.) + 3 electrolyte (Na, K and Cl) methods (option)

measurement

9 Components (1) Analyzer: Chassis Unit

Incubation Reaction Unit

Sample Container Unit

Sample Pipette Unit

Reagent Container Unit

Reagent Pipette Unit

Sample Pump Unit

Reagent Pump Unit

Wash Pump Unit

Detector Unit

Stirrer Unit

Supply Water Unit

Trough Unit

Washing Unit

Subtank

Power Supply Unit

Control Unit

(2) External Tanks: Purified Water Tank

Wastewater Tank

Wash Solution Tank

(3) Option: ISE Unit

Degassing Unit

Sample Barcode Reader

Reagent Barcode Reader

11-1
Chapter 11: Specification

Clot Detection Sensor Unit

External Tank Sensor

9-1 Incubation Reaction Unit

Heating method: Direct heating by silicon-rubber heater (towards the

aluminum heat block)

Heating range: 37±0.1℃

9-2 Cuvette

Material: Resin

Size (outside): 6 (W) x 16.4(D) x 31.2(H) mm

Light length: 5mm

Quantity: 72

Minimum reaction volume: 100μL

Maximum reaction volume: 350μL

9-3 Sample Container

Tube: Diameter: 12mm to 16mm, Length: 75mm to 100mm

(Sample volume (pediatric cup): 50 to 100μL)

Holding structure: Detachable turn table

(Two layer structure: outer tray and inner tray)

Number of sample tube: Outer tray: 40 Sample tubes or Sample cups (Max.)

Inner tray: 10 Sample cups (Max.)

9-4 Sample Pipette Unit

Number of pipettes: 1

Liquid level detection: Micropipette with a liquid level sensor by sensing a

change of capacitance

Sampling volume: Normal sample: 1.5µL to 35µL

ISE sample: 53µL (option)

9-5 Reagent Container

Holding structure: Detachable turn table

Number of reagent bottles: 50 bottles (Max.)

(70mL, 20mL-round, and 20mL-square bottles)

Outer layer: 25 bottles(20mL bottle)

Inner Tray: 25 bottles (70mL bottle)

Cooling method: Cooing with peltier elements

Cooling range: 8 to 15℃

9-6 Reagent Pipette Unit

Number of pipettes; 1

Liquid level detection: Micropipette with a liquid level sensor by sensing a

change of capacitance

11-2
Chapter 11: Specification

Sampling volume: R1: 20µL to 250µL, R2: 20µL to 180µL

9-7 Sample Pump Unit

Pump type: Syringe pump

9-8 Reagent Pump Unit

Pump type: Syringe pump

9-9 Wash Pump Unit

Pump type: Syringe pump

9-10 Detector Unit

Method: Measurement of absorbance (12 wavelength

simultaneous measurement)

Selectable Wavelength: 12 wavelength (340 to 800nm)

Wavelength selection: Grating method

Light source: Tungsten halogen lamp

Cooling for light source: Air-cooled by fan

9-11 Stirrer Unit

Stirring mechanism: Stirrer (stirrer paddle) driven by a stepping motor (in 5

speeds)

9-12 Supply Water Unit:

Washing Unit waste pump: 5 (High concentrated wastewater: WU1, WU2, Low

concentrated wastewater: WU3 to WU5)

Trough wastewater outlet: Free fall

Subtank water supply pump: 1

Trough water supply pump: 4

9-13 Trough Unit

Pipette Trough: 2

Stirrer Trough: 2

9-14 Washing Unit

Cleaning mechanism: 12 cleaning steps


st
1 step: Nozzle 1 drainage + Wash solution supply
nd
2 step: Nozzle 1 drainage + Wash solution supply
rd
3 step: Nozzle 2 drainage + Purified water supply
th
4 step: Nozzle 3 drainage
th
5 step: Nozzle 3 Wash solution supply
th
6 step: Presoak in Wash solution
th
7 step: Nozzle 4 drainage + Purified water supply
th
8 step: Nozzle 4 drainage + Purified water supply
th
9 step: Presoak in Purified water + Water blank

measurement

11-3
Chapter 11: Specification

th
10 step: Presoak in Purified water + Water blank

measurement
th
11 step: Nozzle 5 drainage (Water blank measurement

+ Wipe)
th
12 step: Nozzle 5 drainage (Wipe)

9-15 Subtank Unit

Tank capacity: 800mL

9-16 Power Supply Unit

Power requirement: AC100V to 120V, 6.5A (Max.)

AC200 to 230V, 3.3A (Max.)

50/60Hz

Power Consumption: 650VA

Permissible voltage variation: ±10% (Max.)

9-17 Purified (system) Water Tank, Wash Solution Tank

Tank capacity/quantity: Purified (system) Water Tank (20L): 1

Wash Solution Tank (5L): 2

9-18 Wastewater Tank

Tank capacity/quantity: High Concentrated Wastewater Tank (10L): 1

Low Concentrated Wastewater Tank (20L): 1

10 Other major functions:

- Auto Startup, Shut off and sleep

- Interruption of STAT sample

- Automatic sample dilution

- Water blank measurement

- Reagent blank measurement

- Profile Order

- Auto template function

- Print format edit function

- Host communication (RS-232C)

11 Environmental Requirement:

Operating Temperature: 15 to 30℃ (Acceptable range: 2℃/hour)

Storage Temperature: -10 to 50℃

Operating Humidity: 45 to 85% or less (No condensation)

Humidity (storage/transport): 45 to 85% or less

Operating Pressure: 800 to 1060hPa

Pressure (storage/transport): 500 to 1060hPa

12 Dimensions

Outside dimensions: W870mm x D670mm x H625mm

Mass: 120kg (Max.)

11-4
Chapter 11: Specification

13 Connectors to analyzer

(1) Electrical connectors:

- Power Connector

- RJ-45 modular jack (analyzer - operational PC)

- D-sub receptacle (analyzer - optional external tank

rack)

(2) Supply/drain tubes:

- Purified water inlet

- High Concentrated wastewater outlet

- Low Concentrated wastewater outlet

- Trough, Subtank overflow wastewater outlet

- Wash solution 1 inlet

- Wash solution 2 inlet

14 Maximum sound level

75dB (at the location 1m or longer distant from the analyzer with its cover closed)

15 Transient overvoltage

Overvoltage category II

16 Rated pollution degree

Pollution degree 2

11-5
Chapter 11: Specification

17 The rating and characteristics of fuses

Type Size Rating Characteristics Location and Parts No.

PCB:25P4102
Glass tube fuse 5x20mm 5A/250V Slo-Blo
(ASP/RCU-DRV) F1
PCB:25P4102
Glass tube fuse 5x20mm 10A/250V Slo-Blo
(ASP/RCU-DRV) F2
PCB:25P4101
Glass tube fuse 5x20mm 10A/250V Slo-Blo
(MAIN-DRV) F1, F2
Fuse Holder
Ceramic tube fuse 3AB 10A/250V Slo-Blo
(AC input) F1, F2

11-6
Chapter 11: Specification

11.2 Analysis Specifications


1 Available numbers of analysis method: Up to 240 methods (Serum: 60, Plasma: 60, Urine: 60, Others: 60)

2 Normal range: 50 ranges

6 types = Gender (2 kinds) x Age (3 generations), Others = 44

types

3 Multi-calibrator: Capable of 10 set definition

4 QC sample: Capable of 40 samples registration

5 Profile: Capable of 20 set definition

6 Method to method calculation: Capable of 40 calculations definition

7 Auto template: Capable of 10 set definition

8 Test selection: Normal sample: 1,000 samples (Max.)

Emergency sample: 100 samples (Max.)

9 Reagent registration: 200 types (Max.)

10 Number of reagent bottles installed: 50 bottles (Max.)

11 Measurement results: Measurement results: 1,000,000 tests

Sample time course: 60,000 tests

Calibration results: 25,000 tests

Calibration time course: 6,000 tests

12 Calibration curve: Number of methods x 2 (Old/New): 480 curves

13 QC measurement results: Up to 50,000 tests (for approximately 1 year)

14 Number of identifiable patients: 30,000 patients

15 Number of maximum rounds per day: 99 rounds per day

11-7
Chapter 12: Special tools and materials

Chapter 12 Special tools and materials


This chapter explains:

 Replacement procedure for each unit


 Replacement procedure for major parts within each unit
 Adjustment required after the parts replacement

As parts replacement procedures, only dismounting procedures are explained here.


Mounting procedures are omitted because they are basically the reverse of the
dismounting procedures. Exceptionally, mounting procedures or remarks are given in
cases where adjustment or special care is required.

For dismounting/mounting explained in this chapter, the following items are required:

Special tools and materials


Item Description
Belt Tension Meter Required for replacement of motors with timing belts. After
making motor/timing belt replacement, the tension of the belt
needs to be adjusted. To measure the belt tension, use a tension
meter “DOCTOR TENSION TYPE-I” recommended by the timing
belt manufacturer. Contact us for the tension meter, if necessary.
Liquid Gasket For the wipe tip replacement (WU)
(1212)
Jig Syringe Tip insertion jig
Flare processing jig
Tip replacement jig
Zero position adjusting jig
Silicon Oil Required for syringe tip
(KF-96H-50000CS)
Silicon rubber As weatherstripping of lagging material for the RCU case and the
(KE347W) RCU peltier assembly.
Heat sink Required for a joint area between the RCU case and the RCU
(HSC-50) peltier assembly.

12-1
Chapter 12: Special tools and materials

Required tools
Item Description
Screwdriver Required types:
+ Screwdrivers No.1 and No.2
+ Long Screwdriver No.2
+ Short Screwdriver No.2
- Screwdriver 6 mm
Torque Screwdriver No.2
Hex wrench Required sizes:
1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm
Small ratchet -
set
Ratchet Required sizes for packing:
wrench 13mm
Box Required sizes:
screwdriver 5.5 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm
Spanner Required sizes:
5.5mm, 10mm, 13mm, 14mm, 14.2mm, 17mm, 19mm, 22mm
Long-nose -
pliers
Nipper -
Pliers -
Monkey -
wrench
Tube cutter Required for tubing
Retractable -
knife
Air blower Required for cleaning lens and filters.
Gap gauge Required for clearance adjustment in the pulley.
Tweezers -

Also refer to:


Chapter 13 Lists the parts available for maintenance.
Chapter 14 Electrical connections of PC boards, sensors, and motors, etc.
Chapter 15 Fluidic connections of tubes, pumps, and valves, etc.
Chapter 17 Connector locations

12-2
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

Chapter 13 Maintenance parts list


This chapter indicates:

1. Consumable parts, periodical check parts, and replacement parts.

2. Parts layouts
Each column of the list indicates as follows.

Column Description
Sheet # Parts layouts for a unit are spread into several sheets (or pages). Refer to
the sheet indicating the sheet #. “#” indicates the item # in the sheet.
Code Inform us of the code # when ordering.
Item Inform us of the item when ordering.
Type Inform us of the type when ordering.
Q’ty Purchasing unit
e.g.) When described “100” in the “Q’ty”, place an order by 100 pieces.

The details of the parts layout are indicated by the parts classification.

13.1 Consumable parts


Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty
- 003B0594000 Wash Solution C-1 500ml 1
- 003B0581600 Wash Solution No.3 500ml 1
- 003B0581800 Wash Solution No.9 500m 1
- 003B0555300 Wash Solution No.10-2 500ml 1
- 003B4014300 L Solution 450ml bag 1
- 003B4014400 Ref Solution 140ml bag 1
- 003B4014500 H Solution 12..5ml bottle x 2 1
- 003B4014800 Diluent 450ml bag 1
- 003B4034800 ISE Cleaner 100ml bottle 1
- 003B4014700 Etching: 30ml bottle 1

13-1
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13.2 Periodical replacement parts


A. PSU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


B-1 003B4034900 PSU fan ACE650F 1

B. IRU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


D-1 003B4035000 Slip ring 25BK-X-3163 1

C. DTR

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


E-1 003B4035100 Halogen lamp 25S3558 1

D. WU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


F-1 003B4035200 Wipe tip 25-040-1721 1

E. MIX

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


G-1 003B4039200 Stirrer paddle 25-040-1805 1

F. PP

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


K-1 003B2610900 Syringe tip S1.4 25AZ-X-7109 10
M-1 003B0550800 Syringe tip 3.26 25AZ-X-7508 10
L-1, N-1 003B0551100 Syringe tip 7.26 25AZ-X-7512 10

13-2
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

G. SWU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


P-1 003B4035300 Diaphragm pump 25BK-X-7001 1
assembly WU1-2
P-2 003B4035400 Diaphragm pump 25BC-X-7002 1
assembly
P-3 003B4035500 Diaphragm pump 25BK-X-7003 1
assembly WU5
P-4 003B4025300 Inline filter N 25S3259 1

H. OPTION(ISE)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


S-1 003B4015000 Reference 25S3550 1
electrode
S-2 003B4015100 Na electrode 25S3551 1
S-3 003B4015300 Cl electrode 25S3553 1
S-4 003B4015200 K electrode 25S3552 1
S-5 003B4014900 Tube unit 25S3554 1

13-3
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13.3 Maintenance parts


A. CHS

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


A-1 003B4018600 Auto hinge 25S3545 1
A-2 003B4035700 Air filter L1 25-040-1154 1
A-3 003B4035800 Air filter L2 25-040-1155 1
A-4 003B4035900 Air filter R 25-040-1158 1
A-5 003B4036000 MAIN-DRV PCB 25P4101 1
A-6 003B2605100 IRU_CN1 PCB 25P3510 1
A-7 003B2605200 F-LED PCB 25P3528 1
A-8 003B4036100 CHS fan 25BK-X-3179 1
A-9 003B4036200 Mix arm cover 25-040-S1806 1
A-10 003B4036300 PT arm cover 25-040-S2014 1
A-11 003B4036400 Trough chamber 25-040-S1001 1
assembly
A-12 003B4036500 Trough chamber 25BK-X-3170 1
float sensor
assembly
A-13 003B4036600 Leak sensor 25-040-S1002 1
assembly
A-14 003B4036700 Sponge 25-023-2906 1

B. PSU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


B-2 003B4036900 PSU assembly 25-040-1202 1
B-3 003B4043300 Multi-slot power AC6-2H2HT 1
supply -00-XFN
B-4 003B2605600 POWER-CN PCB 25P3520 1
B-5 003B4036800 Ceramic tube fuse 2

13-4
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

C. CNU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


C-1 003B4037000 CNU assembly 25-040-S1301 1
C-2 003B4037100 CNT-IBM PCB 25P3521-12-M08 1
C-3 003B4171200 CNT-CN PCB 25P4103 1
C-4 Compact flash 1
memory

D. IRU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


D-2 003B4037200 IRU/ASP motor 25-040-S1501 1
assembly
D-3 003B4037300 Rotary encoder 25BK-X-3164 1
assembly
D-4 003B4037400 IRU timing belt B100S2M2296G 1
D-5 003B4037500 TSP PCB 25BK-X-7005 1
assembly
D-6 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
D-7 003B2606100 IRU_CN2 PCB 25P3218 1
D-8 003B4037600 Thermal fuse 25BK-X-3165 1
assembly
D-9 003B4037700 Cuvette (regin) 25S4114 72
D-10 003B4037800 Cuvette (glass) 25S4115 72

E. DTR

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


E-2 003B4038000 DTR assembly 25-040-S1608 1
E-3 003B4037900 DTR fan 25BK-X-3165 1
assembly

13-5
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

F. WU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


F-2 003B4038100 WU assembly 25-040-S1708 1
F-3 003B4038200 WU nozzle base 25-040-S1707 1
assembly
F-4 003B4038300 WU_U/PT_R 25-040-S1701 1
motor assembly
F-5 003B4038400 Supply nozzle 25BK-X-3039 1
assembly
F-6 003B4038500 Drain nozzle 25-040-1716 1
F-7 003B4038600 Wipe nozzle 25-040-1711 1
F-8 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25S3207 1
F-9 003B2011100 WU_SEN PCB 25S3512 1
F-10 003B2012200 WU_CN PCB 25S3527 1
F-11 003B4038700 WU timing belt B60S2M244G 1

G. MIX

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


G-2 003B4038800 MIX assembly 25BK-X-7007 1
G-3 003B4038900 MIX Trough 25-040-S1807 1
assembly
G-4 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
G-5 003B4039000 MIX_K motor 25BK-X-3081 1
assembly
G-6 003B4039100 MIX_U motor 25-040-S1701 1
assembly

13-6
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

H. PT (SPT/RPT)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


H-1 003B4039500 SPT assembly 25-040-S2016 1
H-2 003B4039600 RPT assembly 25-040-S2116 1
H-3 003B4039300 SPT pipette 25-040-S2011 1
assembly
H-4 003B4039400 RPT pipette 25-040-S2111 1
assembly
H-5 003B4038300 WU_U/PT_R 25-040-S1701 1
motor assembly
H-6 003B4039700 PT_U motor 25-040-S2001 1
assembly
H-7 003B2608300 PT_R timing belt B60S2M194G 10
H-8 003B2608500 PT_U timing belt B60S2M334G 10
H-9 003B2606500 MOTOR-SEN-CN 25P3513 1
PCB
H-10 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
H-11 003B4114300 SEN_LL/DL PCB 25P3716 1

I. ASP

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


I-1 003B4040300 ASP assembly 25-040-S2307 1
I-2 003B4039800 ASPBCR 25BK-X-3101 1
assembly (CCD)
I-3 003B4039900 ASPBCR 25S3510 1
assembly (Laser)
I-4 003B4040000 ASP cover 25-040-S2306 1
assembly
I-5 003B4040100 ASP inner tray 25-040-2362 1
assembly
I-6 003B4040200 ASP outer tray 25-040-2361 1
assembly
I-7 003B4040400 ASP case 25-040-S2303 1
assembly
I-8 003B4037200 IRU/ASP motor 25-040-S1501 1
assembly
I-9 003B4018400 ASP/RCU timing B100S2M448G 1
belt
I-10 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
I-11 003B4040500 Interlock switch 25BK-X-3100 1
assembly
I-12 003B4040600 ASP hall sensor 25BK-X-7008 1
assembly

13-7
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

J. RCU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


J-1 003B4041000 RCU assembly 25-040-S2416 1
J-2 003B4040700 RCU cover 25-040-S2421 1
assembly
J-3 003B4040800 RCU tray 25-040-2441 1
assembly
J-4 003B4040900 RCUBCR 25-040-S3651 1
assembly (CCD)
J-5 003B4041100 ASP/RCU_DRV 25P4102 1
PCB
J-6 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
J-7 003B4039700 RCU motor 25-040-S2001 1
assembly
J-8 003B4018400 ASP/RCU timing B100S2M448G 1
belt
J-9 003B4041200 RCU fan assembly 25BK-X-3131 1
(PE1)
J-10 003B4041300 RCU fan assembly 25BK-X-3133 1
(PE2)
J-11 003B4041400 RCU peltier PE1=CN107 1
assembly (PE1)
J-12 003B4041500 RCU peltier PE2=CN106 1
assembly (PE2)
J-13 003B4041600 RCU hall sensor 25BK-X-3143 1
assembly

K. PP (SPP)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


K-2 003B4041800 SPPS assembly 25-040-S2501 1
K-3 003B2604100 Syringe S1.4 25-023-2501 1
K-4 003B4041700 SPP/RPP solenoid 25BK-X-7009 1
valve assembly
K-5 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1

13-8
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

L. PP (SPPW/RPPW)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


L-2 003B4041900 SPPW/RPPW 25-040-S2603 1
assembly
L-3 003B2604200 Syringe S7.2 25-023-2551 1
L-4 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
L-5 003B2608800 SPPW/RPP timing B100S2M212G 10
belt
L-6 003B4037200 IRU/ASP motor 25-040-S1501 1
assembly

M. PP (RPPR)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


M-2 003B4042000 RPPR assembly 25-040-S2701 1
M-3 003B2604300 Syringe R3.2 25-023-2601 1
M-4 003B4000100 SPP/RPP solenoid 25BK-X-7009 1
valve assembly
M-5 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
M-6 003B2608800 SPPW/RPP timing B100S2M212G 10
belt
M-7 003B4037200 IRU/ASP motor 25-040-S1501 1
assembly

N. PP (WPP)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


N-2 003B4042500 WPP assembly 25-040-S2902 1
N-3 003B2604500 Syringe W7.2 25-023-2701 1
N-4 003B4042100 Valve packing 25-023-2653 1
N-5 003B4042200 WPP solenoid 25BK-X-7010 1
valve assembly
N-6 003B0566700 SENSA PCB 25P3207 1
N-7 003B4042300 WPP timing belt B100S2M160G 1
160
N-8 003B4042400 WPP timing belt B100S2M192G 1
192
N-9 003B4037200 IRU/ASP motor 25-040-S1501 1
assembly

13-9
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

O. PP (STK)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


O-1 003B4042800 Subtank assembly 25-040-S3003 1
O-2 003B4042600 Subtank limit 25BK-X-3244 1
sensor assembly
O-3 003B4042700 Subtank float 25BK-X-3243 1
sensor assembly

P. SWU

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


P-5 003B4036600 Leak sensor 25-040-S3103 1
assembly
P-6 003B4036700 Sponge 25-023-2906 1
P-7 003B4031500 Check valve HCV3030SP 1

Q. OPTION (CLOG)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


Q-1 003B4051200 Clot detection 25-040-S3802 1
sensor unit
Q-2 003B4171700 PRE-SEN-CN PCB B25P3535 1
Q-3 003B4051300 Spacer BSB-311E 2
Q-4 003B4051400 Screw (M3×8) M3×8 2
FEZN5-3CM
Q-5 003B4051500 PSJ-J1_PS-J1 line 25BK-X-3261 1
Q-6 003B4051600 CNT_PRE-SEN-CN 25BK-X-3181 1
line
Q-7 003B4051000 SPP-CLOG line 25-040-3901 1
Q-8 003B2101700 PRE-SEN PCB 25P3536 1
Q-9 003B4051700 Pressure sensor 25-023-2542 1
divider

R. OPTION (DGU)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


R-1 003B4051900 Degassing unit 25-040-S4003 1
R-2 003B4050600 SPPS-DGU line 25-040-4022 1
R-3 003B4051100 RPPR-DGU line 25-040-4031 1
R-4 003B4050500 SUBTK-DG line 25-040-4021 1
R-5 003B4051900 Degasser module M60-1600 1
R-6 003B4052000 Degassing pump 25BK-X-3188 1
assembly
R-7 003B4052100 Degassing 25BK-X-3190 1
solenoid valve
assembly
R-8 003B4052200 Pressure SW DP-101Z 1

13-10
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

S. OPTION (ISE)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


S-6 003B4052300 ISE module 25-040-S4101 1
S-7 003B4052400 ISE line 25BK-X-3126 1
S-8 003B4050400 High conc. 25-040-4131 1
wastewater tube
S-9 003B4030400 Deformed 25-023-2963 1
connector 1-3
S-10 003B4046900 High conc. 25-040-3132 1
wastewater tube
S-11 003B4052500 PCB type single LEA50F-12-XFNDB 1
power supply
S-12 003B4051400 Screw M3×8 M3×8 FEZN5-3CM 4
S-13 003B4052700 PS2_IN line 25BK-X-3016 1

T. OPTION (GTK)

Sheet # Code Item Type Q’ty


T-1 003B4052800 External tank rack 25-040-S3702 1
T-2 003B4052900 Connection cable 25-040-S3751 1
T-3 003B4053000 Liquid level 25-040-S3711 1
sensor for Purified
water tank (20L)
T-4 003B4053100 Liquid level 25-040-S3712 1
sensor for Low
conc. wastewater
tank (20L)
T-5 003B4053200 Liquid level 25-040-S3713 1
sensor for high
conc. wastewater
tank (10L)
T-6 003B4053300 Purified water tank 25-040-S3721 1
(20L)
T-7 003B4053400 Low conc. 25-040-S3722 1
wastewater tank
(20L)
T-8 003B4053500 High conc. 25-040-S3723 1
wastewater tank
(10L)
T-9 003B4053600 Wash solution 25-040-S3724 1
tank 1 (2L)
T-10 003B4053700 Wash solution 25-040-S3725 1
tank 2 (2L)
T-11 003B4053800 Supply tube for 25-040-S3714 1
wash solution 1
T-12 003B4053900 Supply tube for 25-040-S3715 1
wash solution 2

13-11
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13.4 Parts layouts


This section indicates parts layouts of the periodical replacement and maintenance
parts.

A. CHS

13-12
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13-13
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

B. PSU

13-14
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

C. CNU

13-15
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

D. IRU

13-16
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13-17
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

E. DTR

13-18
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

F. WU

13-19
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

G. MIX

13-20
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

H. PT (SPT, RPT)

13-21
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

I. ASP

13-22
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13-23
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

J. RCU

13-24
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13-25
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

K. PP (SPPS)

13-26
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

L. PP (SPPW, RPPW)

13-27
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

M. PP (RPPR)

13-28
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

N. PP (WPP)

13-29
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

O. PP (STK)

13-30
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

P. SWU

13-31
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

Q. OPTION(Clot)

13-32
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

R. OPTION(DGU)

13-33
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

S. OPTION(ISE)

13-34
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

13-35
Chapter 13: Maintenance parts list

OPTION(GTK)

13-36
Chapter 14: Electrical connections

Chapter 14 Electrical connections

14-1
Chapter 14: Electrical connections

14-2
Chapter 14: Electrical connections

14-3
Chapter 15: Fluidic system diagram

Chapter 15 Fluidic system diagram

15.1 Inside fluidic system diagram

15-1
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

15.2 Fluidic tube number list


The following list indicates the fluidic tube number, its dimensions (mm), and its
diagram number. The dimensions are corresponding to the alphabet in each diagram.

Fluidic tube No. Fluidic diagram Dimensions (mm)

No. a b c d e
1050 1 +5
100 0
1051 1 +5
140 0
1052 1 +5
80 0
1053 2 +5 +5
130 0 60 0
1054 2 +5 +5
130 0 60 0
1055 3 +5 +5 +5
330 0 20 0 20 0
1056 3 +5 +5 +5
250 0 20 0 20 0
1057 4 +5
60 0
1058 5 +5 +5 +5
250 0 20 0 20 0
1059 5 +5 +5 +5
230 0 20 0 20 0
1060 5 +5 +5 +5
250 0 20 0 20 0
1061 5 +5 +5 +5
270 0 20 0 20 0
1071 6 +10 +5 +5
800 0 20 0 20 0
1072 6 +10 +5 +5
800 0 20 0 20 0
1073 6 +10 +5 +5
600 0 20 0 20 0
1074 6 +10 +5 +5
600 0 20 0 20 0
1075 7 +5 +5 +5
330 0 50 0 50 0
1076 8 +5 +5 +5
400 0 50 0 50 0
1077 8 +5 +5 +5
400 0 50 0 50 0
1078 7 +5 +5 +5
300 0 50 0 50 0
1079 8 +5 +5 +5
400 0 50 0 50 0
1080 8 +5 +5 +5
400 0 50 0 50 0
1081 5 +10 +5 +5
500 0 20 0 20 0

15-3
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Fluidic tube No. Fluidic diagram Dimensions (mm)

No. a b c d e

1082 5 +10 +5 +5
500 0 20 0 20 0
1083 9 +5
30 0
1084 16 +5 +5 +5
450 0 50 0 50 0
1085 13 +5 +5
120 0 55 0
1750 9 +5
10 0
1751 10 +10 +5 +5
500 0 20 0 20 0
1752 10 +10 +5 +5
500 0 20 0 20 0
1753 10 +10 +5 +5
500 0 20 0 20 0
1754 10 +10 +5 +5
500 0 20 0 20 0
1755 5 +10 +5 +5
800 0 20 0 20 0
1756 10 +10 +5 +5
600 0 20 0 20 0
1757 10 +10 +5 +5
600 0 20 0 20 0
1758 10 +10 +5 +5
600 0 20 0 20 0
1759 10 +10 +5 +5
600 0 20 0 20 0
1931 11 +5 +5
60 0 25 0
2031 12 +10 +5 +5 +10
800 0 50 0 50 0 310 0 250
2131 12 +10 +5 +5 +10
1000 0 50 0 50 0 310 0 350
2231 2 +5 +5
210 0 100 0
2232 2 +5 +5
150 0 70 0
2233 2 +5 +5
210 0 100 0
2234 2 +5 +5
150 0 70 0
2235 5 +5 +5 +5
360 0 20 0 20 0
2236 5 +5 +5 +5
480 0 20 0 20 0
2237 5 +5 +5 +5
490 0 20 0 20 0
2461 3 +5 +5 +5
260 0 20 0 20 0
2531 13 +5 +5
150 0 70 0

15-4
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Fluidic tube No. Fluidic diagram Dimensions (mm)

No. a b c d e

3030 5 +10 +5 +5
700 0 20 0 20 0
3031 14 +5
100 0
3032 15 +10 +5 +5
600 0 50 0 150 0
3033 15 +10 +5 +5
600 0 50 0 150 0
3034 15 +5 +5 +5
350 0 50 0 150 0
3035 15 +10 +5 +5
1160 0 50 0 150 0
3121 11 +5 +5
150 0 70 0
3122 11 +5 +5
110 0 50 0
3123 11 +5 +5
70 0 30 0
3131 14 +5
60 0
3132 14 +5
30 0
3201 1 +10
1000 0
3202 14 +10
1000 0
3901 16 +5 +5 +5
250 0 50 0 50 0
4021 15 +10 +5 +5
700 0 50 0 150 0
4022 16 +5 +5 +5
400 0 50 0 50 0
4023 14 +5
50 0
4024 14 +5
150 0
4025 2 +5 +5
150 0 70 0
4026 13 +5 +5
150 0 70 0
4031 16 +10 +5 +5
1160 0 50 0 50 0
4131 17 +5 +5
80 0 35 0

15-5
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

15.3 Fluidic diagram

Figure 15.3-1 Diagram # 1

Figure 15.3-2 Diagram # 2

Figure 15.3-3 Diagram # 3

15-6
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Figure 15.3-4 Diagram # 4

Figure 15.3-5 Diagram # 5

Figure 15.3-6 Diagram # 6

15-7
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Figure 15.3-7 Diagram # 7

Figure 15.3-8 Diagram # 8

Figure 15.3-9 Diagram # 9

15-8
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Figure 15.3-10 Diagram # 10

Figure 15.3-11 Diagram # 11

Figure 15.3-12 Diagram # 12

15-9
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Figure 15.3-13 Diagram # 13

Figure 15.3-14 Diagram # 14

Figure 15.3-15 Diagram # 15

15-10
Chapter 15: Fluidic tubes

Figure 15.3-16 Diagram # 16

Figure 15.3-17 Diagram # 17

15-11
Chapter 16: Sensor list

Chapter 16 Sensor list

Unit Sensor Description Function


CHS RIGHT MIDDLE LEAK Leak sensor at the middle layer of the right side Detects liquid leakage at the middle layer of the right side.
RIGHT LOWER LEAK Leak sensor at the lower layer of the right side Detects liquid leakage at the lower layer of the right side.
LEFT MIDDLE LEAK Leak sensor at the middle layer of the left side Detects liquid leakage at the middle layer of the left side.
CHASSIS FAN CHS fan Built-in sensor in the fan. Detects CHS fan stopping.
PSU FAN POWER PSU fan Built-in sensor in the fan. Detects PSU fan stopping.
IRU ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Point Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position of the cuvette table rotation.
DTR FAN DTR fan Built-in sensor in the fan. Detects DTR fan stopping.
WU WU ORIGIN Up Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the up-and-down zero position (the upper limit).
ASP ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Point Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position of the sample tray rotation.
FRONT COVER Emergency Sample Lid Sensor Hall sensor. Detects the emergency sample Lid condition, open/close.
ALL COVER ASP Lid Sensor Hall sensor. Detects the ASP Lid condition, open/close.
RCU ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Point Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position of the reagent tray rotation.
COVER RCU Lid Sensor Hall sensor. Detects the RCU Lid condition, open/close.
PELTIER1 FAN RCU Peltier1 fan Built-in sensor in the fan. Detects RCU peltier module1 cooling fan stopping
PELTIER2 FAN RCU Peltier2 fan Built-in sensor in the fan. Detects RCU peltier module2 cooling fan stopping.
MIX1 ORIGIN Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects zero position of the trough position.
MIX2 ORIGIN Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects zero position of the trough position.
SPT UP ORIGIN Up Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the up-and-down zero position (the upper limit).
ROTATION ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position for the rotation direction (the position where the pipette
dispenses a sample into a cuvette in the IRU).
DOWN LIMIT Down Limit Sensor Photo interrupter. Normally the gobo of the pipette rests in the photo interrupter and the photo
interrupter is OFF. When the pipette tip reaches the bottom of a sample tube, the gobo of the pipette is
lifted up, resulting that the photo interrupter goes ON. This sensor is used for protection of the pipette.
When the sensor output turns ON, the SPT_U motor stops.
RPT UP ORIGIN Up Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the up-and-down zero position (the upper limit).
ROTATION ORIGIN Rotational Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the zero position for the rotation direction (the position where the pipette
dispenses a reagent into a cuvette in the IRU).
DOWN LIMIT Down Limit Sensor Photo interrupter. Normally the gobo of the pipette rests in the photo interrupter and the photo
interrupter is OFF. When the pipette tip reaches the bottom of a sample tube, the gobo of the pipette is
lifted up, resulting that the photo interrupter goes ON. This sensor is used for protection of the pipette.
When the sensor output turns ON, the RPT_U motor stops.
SPP SPPS ORIGIN SPPS Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the upper limit position of the SPPS plunger.
SPPW ORIGIN SPPW Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the upper limit position of the SPPW plunger.
RPP RPPR ORIGIN RPPR Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the upper limit position of the RPPR plunger.
RPPW ORIGIN RPPW Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the upper limit position of the RPPW plunger.
WPP ORIGIN WPP Zero-Position Sensor Photo interrupter. Detects the upper limit position of the plunger. (Starts aspiration of wash solution or

16-1
Chapter 16: Sensor list

purified water at this position.)


SUB TANK FULL Subtank Full Sensor Float sensor. Detects the liquid level of purified water full.
POSITION Subtank Tank Detection Sensor Limit switch. Detects the subtank is installed in the analyzer.
CHAMBER OVERFLOW Trough Chamber Liquid Level Sensor Float sensor. Detects an overflow at the trough chamber.
DC POWER 24V1A MAIN 24V Power Supply Detection circuit inside the MAIN-DRV PCB. Monitors the +24V power supply on the MAIN-DRV PCB.
24V1B MAIN 24V Power Supply Detection circuit inside the MAIN-DRV PCB. Monitors the +24V power supply on the MAIN-DRV PCB.
24V2A ASP/RCU 24V Power Supply (ASP/RCU) Detection circuit inside the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB. Monitors the +24V power supply for the peltier
module on the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.
24V2B ASP/RCU 24V Power Supply (ASP/RCU) Detection circuit inside the ASP/RCU-DRV PCB. Monitors the +24V power supply for the motor on the
ASP/RCU-DRV PCB.
TANK (OPTION) WATER Liquid level sensor for purified water tank Float sensor. Detects the liquid level of purified water empty (20L tank).
WASH-1 Liquid level sensor for wash solution tank 1 Photo interrupter. Installed at the corner of outside the wash solution tank 1 (5L tank). When the tank
contains some volume, light is interrupted by the liquid and the photo interrupter is OFF. When the tank
becomes empty, the photo interrupter is ON.
WASH-2 Liquid level sensor for wash solution tank 2 Photo interrupter. Installed at the corner of outside the wash solution tank 2 (5L tank). When the tank
contains some volume, light is interrupted by the liquid and the photo interrupter is OFF. When the tank
becomes empty, the photo interrupter is ON.
LOW CONC. WASTE Liquid level sensor for low conc. wastewater tank Float sensor. Detects the liquid level of low conc. wastewater tank full (20L tank).
HIGH CONC. WASTE Liquid level sensor for high conc. wastewater tank Float sensor. Detects the liquid level of high conc. wastewater tank full (10L tank).
DEAERATOR (OPTION) PRESSURE Pressure detection sensor inside the Degassing unit Pressure sensor. Monitors vacuum of the Degassing unit.

16-2
Chapter 17: Test points

Chapter 17 Test points


This chapter helps when checking the DC voltage supply.
Here are described on the test points on each of PCBs that available to check the
voltage.

A. AD-MPX PCB (25P4105)

TP (signal) Range Description

J2-37pin (+) J2-35pin (-) +14.25 to 15.75V V

J2-39pin (+) J2-35pin (-) -14.25 to -15.75V V

TP16 (+) TP15 (-) +11.50V to 12.50V V

TP14 (+) TP15 (-) -11.50V to -12.50V V

TP13 (+) TP15 (-) +4.80V to 5.20V V

Figure 17.1-1

 When the PCB incorporated in the system, it is difficult to check each of the
voltage on the PCB.

17-1
Chapter 17: Test points

B. ASP/RCU-DRV PCB (25P4102)

TP (signal) Range Description

TP2 (+) TP9 (-) +11.50V to 12.50V V

TP3 (+) TP6 (-) +4.80V to 5.20V V

TP8 (+) TP9 (-) +23.5V to 24.5V V

TP10 (+) TP9 (-) +23.5V to 24.5V V

Figure 17.1-2

C. CNT-CN PCB (25P4103)

TP (signal) Range Description

TP5 (+) TP4 (-) +5.00V to 5.20V V

17-2
Chapter 17: Test points

D. IRU_CN1 PCB (25P3510)

TP (signal) Range Description

TP13 (+) U19-Gpin (-) +4.80V to 5.20V V

TP15 (+) U19-Gpin (-) +3.20V to 3.40V V

TP19 (+) U19-Gpin (-) +2.40V to 2.60V V

Figure 17.1-3

E. IRU_CN2 PCB (25P3218)

TP (signal) Range Description

J1-7pin (+) J1-12pin (-) +4.80V to 5.20V V

Figure 17.1-4

17-3
Chapter 17: Test points

F. MAIN-DRV PCB (25P4101)

TP (signal) Range Description

TP2 (+) TP3 (-) +4.80V to 5.20V V

TP27 (+) TP3 (-) +3.20V to 3.40V V

TP18 (+) TP3 (-) +1.15V to 1.25V V

TP88 (+) TP90 (-) +23.50V to 24.50V V

TP33 (+) TP90 (-) +23.50V to 24.50V V

TP32 (+) TP90 (-) +23.50V to 24.50V V

TP89 (+) TP90 (-) +23.50V to 24.50V V

Figure 17.1-5

17-4
Chapter 17: Test points

G. WU_SEN PCB (25P3512)

TP (signal) Range Description

J1-1pin (+) TP8 (-) +4.80V to 5.20V V

Figure 17.1-6

 When the PCB incorporated in the system, it is difficult to check each of the
voltage on the PCB.

17-5
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

Chapter 18 Barcode (BCR) adjustment

18.1 In case when the barcode label cannot be read


A. Barcode labels

Check point Remarks Check

Margins for both ends are wide enough? Required margin:

at least 4mm for both ends or ten times width



than a thin bar.

No stains or torn on the barcode labels?



Uneven print density (too light or dark)? In uneven bar printing density, the ratio may

becomes difference between the space width



between bars and the bar width. It may

causes the BCR cannot read the labels.

Are label size and the pasting position under Check that the labels are pasted in the proper

the specifications? position angles (skew, tilt, and pitch).


B. Barcode Specifications

Check point Remarks Check

Are the symbols in-use under specifications? Sample BCR specifications:

Available symbols: UPC (JAN), CODE39、ITF、



NW7、CODE 128(A/B/C)

Note: In case of UPC, check digit is required.

In case of ITF, fixed even digit numbers are

required.

The check digit needs to be calculated

followed by ANSI standards.

Reagent BCR specifications:

Available symbols: UPC (JAN), CODE39、ITF、

NW7、CODE 128(A/B/C)

Both of the setting in the operational PC and The setting for check digits (with/without) is

the actual labels are consistent under the available only for the Sample BCR

check-digit setting (with or without). specifications.

18-1
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

C. Analyzer status check

Check point Remarks Check

Is the lid closed when reading labels? If any ambient light break through on the

barcode labels or the reading window of the



BCR, BCR may not read the labels.

Are barcode labels are facing outside? Adjust the label position at center of the

cutout window of the holder.



Is the sample tube size in-use 12 to 16 mm in In case of placing the 16mm (or

diameter? more)-diameter sample tube, the holder



becomes widen. It causes the label part

clearly invisible from the reading window.

No contamination or condensation on the If the RCU lid is kept open or opened and

glass BCR window of the RCU? closed frequently, condensation may occur.

18-2
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

18.2 Adjustment of the BCR reading position


 The BCR reading position was carefully adjusted at the factory shipment. If
moving the position carelessly, it may not return to the original position.
Careful handling is required.
 Check that there are no problems on the parts (barcode labels, PCB,
harnesses, etc) and perform BCR adjustment.
 When BCR position adjustment, check your BCR type (CCD or laser). They
have different screw positions for BCR reading positions.

 Do not look directly at a laser beam from the barcode reader.

A. Barcode scan check for reagent BCR

1. Select the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.

Figure 18.2-1

2. Click the [Reagent Barcode Adjustment] button. The following pop-up


message appears.

Figure 18.2-2

3. Click the [OK] button. Reagent BCR starts reading the barcode label.

18-3
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

4. When 20 scans successfully completed and all of the scan results are
recognized equal, the pop-up message appears including the scanned data.
When one or more out of 20 scans failed or any of the scan results are not
recognized equal, the following pop-up message appears including all 20
scanned data.

Figure 18.2-3

5. To scan barcode label successfully, adjust BCR position.


To rescan the barcode label, click the [Re-Scan] button in the pop-up message.

18-4
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

B. Reagent BCR position adjustment

1. Dismount the Mosaic-front.

2. Loosen the 3 screws (M3×8).

Figure 18.2-4

3. Adjust BCR reading position.

4. Tighten the 3 screws (M3×8).

5. Mount the Mosaic-front.

6. Perform barcode scan check for reagent BCR.

18-5
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

C. Barcode scan check for sample BCR

1. Select the [Maintenance (F10)] > [Sequence] screen.

Figure 18.2-5

2. Click the [Sample Barcode Adjustment] button. The following pop-up message
appears. Place the labeled reagent bottle on the position #40.

Figure 18.2-6

3. Click the [OK] button. Sample BCR starts reading the barcode label.

18-6
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

4. When 20 scans successfully completed and all of the scan results are
recognized equal, the pop-up message appears including the scanned data.
When one or more out of 20 scans failed or any of the scan results are not
recognized equal, the following pop-up message appears including all 20
scanned data.

Figure 18.2-7

5. To scan barcode label successfully, adjust BCR position.


To rescan the barcode label, click the [Re-Scan] button in the pop-up message.

D. Sample BCR reading position adjustment (CCD type)

1. Dismount the Mosaic-front.

2. Loosen the 3 screws (M3×8).

Figure 18.2-8

3. Adjust BCR reading position.


18-7
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

4. Tighten the 3 screws (M3×8).

5. Mount the Mosaic-front.

6. Perform barcode scan check for sample BCR.

E. Sample BCR reading position adjustment (Laser type)

1. Dismount the Mosaic-front.

2. Loosen the 2 screws (M3×8).

Figure 18.2-9

3. Adjust BCR reading position.

4. Tighten the 2 screws (M3×8).

5. Mount the Mosaic-front.

6. Perform barcode scan check for sample BCR.

18-8
Chapter 18: Barcode (BCR) adjustment

18.3 Barcode label position


A. Readable position range

 Reagent BCR label including the blank space needs to be positioned within
9mm to 77mm (9mm+68mm) area from the bottom.
 Sample BCR label including the blank space needs to be positioned within
12.5mm to 85.5mm (12.5mm+73mm) area from the bottom.

Figure 18.3-1

B. Barcode label pasting angle

 For the reagent bottle, paste the label within the angle α=1º.
 For the sample tube, paste the label within the angle β=5º.

Figure 18.3-2

18-9
Chapter 19: LAN connection check

Chapter 19 LAN connection check


It is available to check LAN cable is properly connected between the operational PC
and the analyzer.
Ping command is used for verifying the connection. It sends IP packets to host
computer and measures the time to receive the response.
When the ping command is successfully executed, it can be verified that the network is
properly connected.
If any error occurs, some network failures may occur.

19.1 Connection check


If any errors occur when using the analyzer, check the following points.

1. Check of network environment

 Ethernet: 10/100/1000Base-T
 LAN cable: crossover cable

2. Check of the operational PC settings

 TCP/IP setting
Operational PC: 172.17.31.201
 Security setting
Firewall: Off
Automatic updates: Off
Malware protection: Off

19.2 LAN check (Ping command)


1. Enter the ping command on the command prompt window in the following
procedure.
(a) Click the [Start] button at the lower left of the screen.
(b) Click [Run].

Figure 19.2-1

19-1
Chapter 19: LAN connection check

(c) Enter the ping command as follows.


Command: ping –l 1024 172.17.31.202

Figure 19.2-2

(d) Click the [OK] button to execute the ping command.

2. After pinging the command, the following results are displayed on the screen.

Figure 19.2-3

19-2

You might also like